E.F. Johnson Company MULTI-NET II Setup And Alignment Manual

MULTI-NET

®

II SWITCH

SET-UP AND

ALIGNMENT

M

ULTI

-N

ET

®

II

3000 S

ERIES

S

WITCH

S

ET

-U

P

A

ND

A

LIGNMENT

October 2003

Supersedes: Part No. 001-3139-003/004; 5/99

MULTI-NET

®

II

3000 SERIES SWITCH

SETUP AND ALIGNMENT MANUAL

Copyright© 2003 by the EFJohnson Company

The EFJohnson Company, which was founded in 1923, provides wireless communication systems solutions for public safety, government, and commercial customers. The company designs, manufactures, and markets conventional and trunked radio systems, mobile and portable subscriber radios, repeaters, and Project 25 digital radio products. EFJohnson is a wholly owned subsidiary of EFJ, Inc.

Viking Head/EFJohnson logo, Multi-Net

®

, and LTR

® are registered trademarks of the EFJohnson Company. All other company and/or product names used in this manual are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of their respective manufacturer.

Information in this manual is subject to change without notice. The EFJohnson Company will not be liable for any misunderstanding due to misinformation or errors found in this document.

SAFETY INFORMATION

The FCC has adopted a safety standard for human exposure to RF energy. Proper operation of this radio under normal conditions results in user exposure to RF energy below the Occupational Safety and Health Act and Federal

Communication Commission limits.

WARNING

DO NOT allow the antenna to touch or come in very close proximity with the eyes, face, or any exposed body parts while the radio is transmitting.

DO NOT allow the antenna to come close to or touch, the eyes, face, or any exposed body parts while the radio is transmitting.

DO NOT operate the radio in explosive or flammable atmospheres. The transmitted radio energy could trigger blasting caps or cause an explosion.

DO NOT operate the radio without the proper antenna installed.

DO NOT operate the radio unless all radio frequency connectors are secure and any open connectors are properly terminated.

DO NOT allow children to operate or play with this equipment.

NOTE: The above warning list is not intended to include all hazards that may be encountered when using this radio.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the condition that this device does not cause harmful interference. In addition, changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by

EFJohnson could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment (FCC rules, 47CFR Part 15.19).

LAND MOBILE PRODUCT WARRANTY

The manufacturer’s warranty statement for this product is available from your product supplier or from EFJohnson

Company, 299 Johnson Avenue, Box 1249, Waseca, MN 56093-0514. Phone (507) 835-6222.

TABLE OF CONTENTS


1 INTRODUCTION

1.1

SCOPE OF MANUAL

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.2

DEFINITIONS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Trunked System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

LTR Trunked System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Multi-Net Trunked System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Conventional System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

3000 Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Call Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

System and Subscriber Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Repeater Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Home Repeater Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Status Repeater Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Monitor Repeater Channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Telephone Interconnect and Data Transmission . 1-2

Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) . . . 1-2

Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX) . . 1-2

2 3000 SERIES SWITCH

2.1

INTRODUCTION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.2

ELEMENTS OF THE SWITCH

. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

2.3

SWITCH MODULES (ELEMENTS)

. . . . . . . . 2-2

3 ARCHITECTURE

3.1

INTRODUCTION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.2

SWITCH INTERFACES

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.3

BUS STRUCTURE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Data Bus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Control Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Voice Bus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

4 SYSTEM RACK

4.1

TWO SHELF 3000 SERIES SWITCH

. . . . . . 4-1

Power Consumption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Two Shelf Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Power Supply Redundant Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Voltage Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Redundant Supply Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Verify Fan Air Flow Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Verify Voltages on Power Distribution Cable. . . 4-3

System Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Final Configuration Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

4.2

FOUR SHELF 3000 SERIES SWITCH

. . . . . 4-7

Power Consumption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

4-Shelf Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Power Supply Redundant Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Voltage Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Redundant Supply Adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Verify Fan Air Flow Direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Verify Voltages On Power Distribution Cable . 4-8

System Test Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Final Configuration Verification . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

4.3

SIX SHELF 3000 SERIES SWITCH

. . . . . . 4-13

Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Verify Resistance of Bus Bar and Power Supply

Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Verify Cooling Fan Air Flow Direction. . . . . . 4-14

Verify Voltages On Power Distribution Cable 4-14

System Test Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14


4.4

EIGHT SHELF 3000 SERIES SWITCH . . . . 4-20

Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20


Verify Resistance of Bus Bar and Power

Supply Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Verify Cooling Fan Air Flow Direction. . . . . . 4-21

Verify Voltages On Power Distribution Cable 4-21

System Test Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21


5 CALL PROCESSOR

5.1

INTRODUCTION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.2

DATA BUSES

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.3

CALL PROCESSOR CONTROL

. . . . . . . . . . 5-2

System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Manual Device Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Subscriber Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Activity Log Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Call Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Keyboard Lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Log Out/Log In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

5.4

ALARM CONTROL

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

5.5

SYSTEM ANALYZER

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

5.6

CALL PROCESSING

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

6 NETWORK INTERFACE MODULE

(NetNIM)

6.1

DESCRIPTION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.2

OPERATION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

6.3

SETUP PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

6.4

ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS

. . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Detector Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

i


TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT’D)

7 BASIC BOARD MODULE (BBM)

External Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Alignment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

7.1

DESCRIPTION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Main Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Secondary Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Internal Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.2

BBM SETUP PROCEDURE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Jumper Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

BBM Backplane External Connections . . . . . . . . 7-3

7.3

BBM ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES

. . . . . . . 7-4

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

7.4

TEST TASKS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

System Switch Equals “1” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5









7.5

TROUBLESHOOTING

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Test “1” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Test “2” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Test “3” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Test “4” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Test “5” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Test “6” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Test “7” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Test “8” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Test “9” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

7.6

DS1 DISPLAY DEFINITIONS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

8 CHANNEL INTERFACE MODULE

(CIM)

9 CONVENTIONAL CHANNEL MODULE

(CCM)

9.1

DESCRIPTION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Repeater Signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Repeater Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Voice Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9


9.2

CCM SETUP PROCEDURE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

CCM Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

AFSK Communication on the Main Lines . . . . . 9-9

CCM Jumper Placement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

CCM Backplane External Contacts . . . . . . . . . 9-10

9.3

CCM ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS . . . . 9-10

Pre-Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

CCM Alignment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

10 DISPATCH CHANNEL MODULE

(DCM)

10.1

DESCRIPTION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Repeater Signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Repeater Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Voice Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Internal Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

10.2

DCM SETUP PROCEDURE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

DCM Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

AFSK Communication on the Main Lines . . . . 10-1

DCM Jumper Placement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

DCM Backplane External Contacts . . . . . . . . . 10-2

10.3

DCM ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS . . . . 10-2

Pre-Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

DCM Alignment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

11 DISPATCH INTERFACE MODULE

(DIM)

8.1

DESCRIPTION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Repeater Signaling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Repeater Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Voice Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1


8.2

CIM SETUP PROCEDURE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Jumper Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

CIM Backplane External Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

External Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

8.3

CIM ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS

. . . . . 8-4

Pre-Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

CIM Alignment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

8.4

CIM AUDIO SUMMATION PERSONALITY

CARD

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Internal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

11.1

DESCRIPTION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

11.2

DIM SETUP PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

DIM Jumper Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

E-Lead Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

DIM Backplane External Contacts . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

11.3

DIM ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATION

. . . . . . 11-2

Pre-Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

Pre-Alignment With Tone Remote Personality

Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

11.4

ALIGNMENT

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

11.5

TONE REMOTE DTMF OPERATION

. . . . . 11-4 ii



12 INTELLIGENT DISPATCH MODULE

(IDM)

12.1

DESCRIPTION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

12.2

IDM SETUP PROCEDURE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

IDM Jumper Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

IDM Backplane External Contacts . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

12.3

IDM ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATION

. . . . . . 12-4

Pre-Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4

12.4

ALIGNMENT

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4

12.5

PCM SUMMATION PERSONALITY CARD

12-5

Internal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5

External Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5

Alignment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5

13 SYSTEM NETWORK MODULE (SNM)

13.1

DESCRIPTION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

13.2

SNM SETUP PROCEDURE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2

SNM Switch Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2

AFSK Communication on the Main Lines . . . . 13-2

SNM Jumper Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2

SNM Backplane External Contacts . . . . . . . . . . 13-2

13.3

SNM ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS

. . . . 13-2

Pre-Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2

SNM Alignment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2

14 TELEPHONE INTERFACE MODULE

(TIM)

14.1

DESCRIPTION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

Signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

Call Supervision. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

Intra-terminal Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

Telephone Line Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3

Audio Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3

Receive Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3

Transmit Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4

14.2

4-WIRE E&M INTERFACE DESCRIPTION

14-4

Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4

E&M Leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4

8-position Dip Switch S201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

Type I and V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6

Type II and III . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6

Type IV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6

Type II Trunk-To-Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6

Type V Trunk-to-Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7

14.3

LED STATUS FOR E&M LEADS

. . . . . . . . . 14-7

TELCO Side Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7

E&M Logic Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7

14.4

E&M LEAD CIRCUIT THEORY OF

OPERATION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8

E&M Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8

Signal Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8

14.5

TIM SETUP PROCEDURE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11

TIM Jumper Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11

Main Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11

14.6

2WY SETUP AND ALIGNMENT

PROCEDURES (-670)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11

2WY Jumper Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11

2WY Pre-Alignment Procedures . . . . . . . . . . 14-11

14.7

2-WAY TIM ALIGNMENT


. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13

Main Receive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13

Dial Tone Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13

Output Hybrid Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14

14.8

DID SETUP AND ALIGNMENT (-660)

. . . 14-15

DID Personality Card Jumper Settings. . . . . . 14-15

Pre-Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15

14.9

DID OPERATIONAL ALIGNMENT


. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16

14.10 E&M SETUP AND ALIGNMENT (-680)

. . 14-17


Transmit Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17

Receiver Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18

4-Wire E&M Dial Tone Detector Receive

Alignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18

14.11 TERMSET MODULES

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23

Equipment Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23

Initializing the Tellabs Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23

Switch Settings On 6132A (DID

Applications) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-24

XEL Termset Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-25

Connection To the Phone Lines . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26

Final Path Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-27

14.12 BACKGROUND INFORMATION

. . . . . . . . 14-27

Standard Signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-27

Outlined Objective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-27

The Order of Things . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-27

14.13 TUNING A DOD OR DID 2-WIRE INTERFACE

TO THE 4-WIRE E&M BOARD.

. . . . . . . . 14-28

14.14 BALANCING TO THE CENTRAL

OFFICE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-30

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-30

Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-30

Adding Capacitance to the Termset . . . . . . . . 14-30

Rural Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-30

Urban Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-30

14.15 FCC USER INSTRUCTIONS AND

CUSTOMER INFORMATION

. . . . . . . . . . 14-31 iii



15 VOTER DIAGNOSTICS MODULE

(VDM)

20 MULTI-NET CONSOLE MODULE

(MCM)

15.1

DESCRIPTION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

15.2

VDM SETUP PROCEDURE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

Jumper Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2

VDM Backplane External Contacts. . . . . . . . . . 15-2

15.3

VDM ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS

. . . . 15-2

16 POWER TERMINATION MODULE

(PTM)

16.1

DESCRIPTION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

16.2

SETUP PROCEDURE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

17 LOGGING ENCODER MODULE (LEM)

17.1

DESCRIPTION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1

17.2

LEM SETUP PROCEDURE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2

LEM Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2

LEM Jumper Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2

LEM Backplane External Contacts . . . . . . . . . . 17-2

17.3

LEM ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS

. . . . 17-2

Pre-Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2

LEM Alignment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2

18 VOICE TONE MODULE (VTM)

18.1

DESCRIPTION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1

18.2

SETUP PROCEDURE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1

VTM Jumper Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1

VTM Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1

18.3

ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS

. . . . . . . . . 18-1

19 WIDE AREA MODULE (WAM)

19.1

DESCRIPTION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1

19.2

WAM SETUP PROCEDURE

. . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2

WAM Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2

WAM Jumper Placement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2

WAM Backplane External Contacts . . . . . . . . . 19-2

19.3

WAM ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS

. . . 19-2

Pre-Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2

WAM Alignment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2

19.4

WAM E&M-LEAD CONNECTIONS

. . . . . . 19-4

One Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-5

Two Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-5

Three Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-5

19.5

M-LEAD SPLITTER BOX

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-5

General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-5

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-5

19.6

WAM AUDIO CONNECTIONS

. . . . . . . . . . . 19-6

20.1

DESCRIPTION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1

20.2

MCM SETUP PROCEDURE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2

Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2

MCM Jumper Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2

MCM Backplane External Contacts . . . . . . . . . 20-2

20.3

MCM ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATION

. . . . . 20-2

Pre-Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2

20.4

ALIGNMENT

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-3

20.5

PCM SUMMATION PERSONALITY CARD

20-4

Internal Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-4

External Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-4

Alignment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-4

21 CONVENTIONAL PATCH MODULE

(CPM)

21.1

DESCRIPTION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1

21.2

PCM SETUP PROCEDURE

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1

Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1

CPM Jumper Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1

E-Lead Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2

CPM Backplane External Contacts . . . . . . . . . 21-2

21.3

CPM ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATION

. . . . . 21-2

Pre-Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2

Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2

22 POWER SUPPLY

22.1

INTRODUCTION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1

22.2

POWER CONSUMPTION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1

23 BACKPLANE

23.1

DESCRIPTION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1

23.2

BACKPLANE SETUP PROCEDURE

. . . . . 23-1

Shelf Address Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1

Termination Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1

Jumper Definitions and Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1

23.3

STANDARD SHELF I/O CONNECTIONS

. 23-2

23.4

CIM SHELF I/O CONNECTIONS

. . . . . . . . . 23-3

Primary PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-3

Secondary PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-3

23.5

NetNIM SHELF WITH CIM/CCMs

. . . . . . . . 23-4

23.6

NetNIM SHELF WITHOUT CIM/CCMs . . . . 23-5

iv


24 INTERCOM


24.1

DESCRIPTION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1

24.2

INSTALLATION

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1

Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1

Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1

APPENDIX A ERROR MESSAGES

A.1

IDB Error Messages To Message

Accounting Bus From Modules

. . . . . . . .A-1

A.2

MAB Error Messages From System

Management Module

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-2

APPENDIX B CALL SEQUENCES

B.1

GROUP CALL

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

Mobile To Mobile On Same Site. . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

Mobile To Mobile With DIM Monitoring. . . . . B-1

B.2

Dispatch Console (DC) To Mobile Group

Call

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

B.3

Mobile Group Call To Dispatch Console

. B-1

B.4

Mobile To Unique ID

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2

B.5

Mobile To Unique ID For a Mobile Outside

Switch

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3

B.6

Mobile To Directed Group Call (DTMF

Entry Within Switch)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3

B.7

Mobile To Directed Group Call (DTMF

Entry Outside the Switch)

B-4

B.8

Mobile Originated Telephone Call

. . . . . . . B-5

B.9

Landside (TIM) Originate To Mobile

Within Switch Using a DID Line

. . . . . . . B-6

B.10 Landside (TIM) Originate To Mobile

Within Switch Using a 2WY Line

. . . . . . B-6

B.11 TIM Originate To Mobile Outside Switch

Using a DID Line

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7

B.12 Landside Originate To Mobile Outside

Switch Using a 2WY Line

. . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7

LIST OF FIGURES

2-1 2-Shelf 3000 Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

2-2 4-Shelf 3000 Series Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

2-3 6-Shelf Switch Rack Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

2-4 8-Shelf Switch Rack Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

3-1 Multi-Net System Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3-2 Data Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

3-3 Control Buses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

3-4 Voice Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

4-1 2-shelf 3000 Series Switch Backplane Cables. . 4-6

4-2 2-shelf 3000 Series Switch Setup . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

4-3 4-shelf 3000 Series Switch Backplane Cables. 4-12

4-4 4-shelf 3000 Series Switch Setup . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

4-5 Six Shelf 3000 Series Switch Backplane Cables 4-18

4-6 Six Shelf 3000 Series Switch Setup. . . . . . . . . 4-19

4-7 Eight Shelf 3000 Series Sw Backplane Cables 4-25

4-8 8-Shelf 3000 Series Switch Rack Setup . . . . . 4-26

4-9 2-4 Shelf Power Supply Interconnect . . . . . . . 4-27

4-10 6-8 Shelf Power Supply Interconnect Diagram 4-28

5-1 Data Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

6-1 Data Bus Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6-2 NetNIM Card Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

6-3 NetNIM Alignment Points Diagram . . . . . . . . . 6-4

7-1 Basic Board Module Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . 7-2

7-2 Basic Board Module Align Points Diagram . . . 7-12

7-3 Basic Board Module Card Edge Layout. . . . . . 7-13

8-1 Alignment Points Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

8-2 CIM Input and Output Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

8-3 Summation Board Alignment Points Diagram. . 8-7

9-1 Alignment Points Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11



11-2 PTT Tone Remote Card Block Diagram . . . . . 11-6

11-3 PTT Tone Remote Card Alignment Points Diag 11-7

12-1 IDM Data Bus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1


12-3 Summation Board Alignment Points Diagram. 12-6

13-1 Data Bus Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1


13-3 SNM Cable Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

14-1 Data Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

14-2 E&M Interface Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

14-3 S201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

14-4 TYPE I and V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6

14-5 TYPE II and III. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6

v


LIST OF FIGURES (CONT’D)

14-6 TYPE IV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6

14-7 TYPE II Trunk-Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7

14-8 TYPE IV Trunk-Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7

14-9 E&M Personality Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7

14-10 Main Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7

14-11 Type III Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8

14-12 Charging Characteristic of C227 . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8

14-13 4-Wire E&M Block Diagram (-680) . . . . . . . . 14-9

14-14 DT & MBS Personality Card Blk Diag (-670) 14-10

14-15 DID Personality Card Block Diagram (-660) 14-10

14-16 Transmit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18

14-17 Receive Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-18

14-18 Alignment Points Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19

14-19 DT & MBS Alignment Points Diagram (-670) 14-20

14-20 DID Alignment Points Diagram (-660) . . . . . 14-21

14-21 4-Wire E&M Alignment Points Diag (-680) . 14-22

14-22 TELLABS 6132B - POTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23

14-23 TELLABS 6132A - DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-24

14-24 XEL Termset Rack (Rear Close-up) . . . . . . . 14-25

14-25 Termset Rack (Front View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26

14-26 Network Link (Switch Rack Back View) . . . 14-26

14-27 E&M Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-28

14-28 Tellabs 6132A/B Termset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-29

14-29 6132 Tellabs Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-31

15-1 Data Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

15-2 VDM Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2

15-3 Alignment Points Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3

16-1 Power Termination Mod Align Points Diag . . 16-2



18-1 Voice Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2

18-2 VTM Card Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3



19-3 WAM E&M Lead Cable Layout 1 Location . . 19-4

19-4 WAM E&M Lead Cable Layout 2 Locations . 19-5

19-5 M-Lead Splitter Box I/Os . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-5

19-6 WAM E&M Lead Cable Layout 3 Locations . 19-6

19-7 WAM Audio Cable Layout One Location. . . . 19-6

19-8 WAM Audio Cable Layout Two Locations . . 19-6

19-9 Audio Cable Lay. Two Loc. w/Ext Audio Dev 19-7

19-10 Audio Cable Lay. Host Loc. 3 Location Config 19-7



20-3 Summation Board (-760) Align Points Diagram 20-6

21-1 CPM Alignment Points Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3

22-1 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1

22-2 6-8 Shelf Power Supply Interconnect Diagram 22-2

22-3 A3-A4 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-3

22-4 A5-A6 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-3

22-5 Power Supply Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-3

22-6 Power Supply Drawer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-4

22-7 2-4 Shelf Power Supply Interconnect . . . . . . . . 22-5

22-8 2-4 Shelf Power Supply (Front View) . . . . . . . 22-6

22-9 2-4 Shelf Power Supply (Rear View) . . . . . . . . 22-6

23-1 Std Shelf Backplane Sw and Jumper Settings . 23-2

23-2 S2 - S8 Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-3

23-3 CIM/CCM Shelf Backplane Sw & Jmpr Set. . . 23-3

23-4 NetNIM Shelf w/CIM/CCMs Sw & Jmpr Set.. 23-4

23-5 NetNIM Shelf w/o CIM/CCMs Sw & Jmpr Set. 23-5

23-6 2-Shelf 3000 Series Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-6

23-7 4-Shelf 3000 Series Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-6

23-8 6-Shelf Switch Rack Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-7

23-9 8-Shelf Switch Rack Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-8

23-10 2-Shelf Switch Backplane Cables. . . . . . . . . . . 23-9

23-11 4-Shelf Switch Backplane Cables. . . . . . . . . . . 23-9

23-12 6-Shelf Switch Backplane Cables. . . . . . . . . . 23-10

23-13 8-Shelf Switch Backplane Cables. . . . . . . . . . 23-11

23-14 Basic Board Backplane Wiring Layout . . . . . 23-12

23-15 NetNIM Shelf Backplane Wiring Layout. . . . 23-12

23-16 Telephone Terminal Block Layout. . . . . . . . . 23-13

23-17 Backplane I/O Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-14

B-1 SNM Unique ID Request Flowchart . . . . . . . . B-8

B-2 DIM Unique ID Request Flowchart . . . . . . . . . B-9

B-3 CIM DTMF Auxiliary Call Flowchart . . . . . . . B-9

B-4 Dialed Digits and Number of Digits Flowchart B-10

B-5 Telephone TIM Incoming Flowchart . . . . . . . B-11

B-6 Telephone Calling CIM Call Req Flowchart . B-12

B-7 Dynamic Reass User Interface Req Flowchart B-13

B-8 Selective Unit Dis User Interface Req Flow . B-13

vi


LIST OF TABLES

2-1 Switch Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

4-1 Average Voltage/Current/Power . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4-2 Power Supply Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

4-3 Power Distribution Cable Voltages . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4-4 PCM Cable Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4-5 S1 Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

4-6 Average Voltage/current/power . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

4-7 Power Supply Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

4-9 PCM Cable Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

4-8 Power Distribution Cable Voltages . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

4-10 S1 Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

4-11 Average Voltage/Current/Power . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

4-12 Bus Bar Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

4-13 Power Distribution Cable Voltages . . . . . . . . . 4-14

4-15 S1 Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

4-14 PCM Cable Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

4-16 Average Voltage/Current/Power . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

4-17 Bus Bar Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

4-18 Power Distribution Cable Voltages . . . . . . . . . 4-21

4-19 PCM Cable Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

4-20 S1 Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

6-1 NIM Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

7-1 Basic Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

7-2 Basic Board Jumper Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

7-3 Backplane Pin-outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

7-4 DIM Card Display/tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

7-5 CCM Card Display Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

7-6 CIM Card Display/tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

7-7 TIM Card Display/tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

7-9 DCM Card Display/tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

7-8 SNM Card Display/tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

7-11 LEM Card Display/tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

7-12 GPM Card Display/tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

7-13 VDM Card Display/tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

7-10 IDM Card Display/tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

7-14 WAM Card Display/tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

8-1 CIM Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

8-2 CIM Board Jumper Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

8-3 Backplane Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

8-4 CIM External Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

9-1 CCM Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

9-2 CCM Jumper Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

9-3 CCM External Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

10-1 DCM Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

10-2 DCM Jumper Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

10-3 DCM External Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

11-1 DIM Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

11-2 DIM Board Jumper Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

11-3 Backplane Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

11-4 Tone Remote Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4

12-1 IDM Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

12-2 IDM Board Jumper Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2


13-1 SNM Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2

13-2 SNM Jumper Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2

13-3 SNM External Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2

14-1 E&M Card S201 DIP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . 14-5

14-2 E&M Lead States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6

14-3 TIM Jumper Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11

14-4 TIM Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11

14-5 2WY Jumper Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11

14-6 DID Jumper Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15

14-7 E&M Main Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17

14-8 E&M Jumper Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17

14-9 Tellabs 6132B - POTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23

14-10 Tellabs 6132A - DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-24

14-11 E&M To Termset Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-27

14-12 System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-31

15-2 VDM Board Jumper Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2


15-1 VDM Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2

16-1 S5/S7 Switch Termination Settings . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

16-2 S6/S8 Switch Termination Settings . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

17-1 LEM Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2

17-2 LEM Jumper Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2

17-3 LEM External Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2

18-1 VTM Board Jumper Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1

18-2 VTM Board Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1

18-3 VTM PCM Bus Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2

19-1 WAM Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2

19-2 WAM Jumper Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2

19-3 WAM External Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2

20-1 MCM Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2

20-2 MCM Jumper Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2


21-1 CPM Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1

21-2 CPM Board Jumper Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1

21-3 Backplane Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2

22-1 Average Voltage/Current/Power . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1

23-1 Shelf Address Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1

23-2 Termination Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1

vii



This page intentionally left blank.

viii

INTRODUCTION

SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION

1.1 SCOPE OF MANUAL

This manual describes the 3000 Series Switch modules and the alignment instructions for these modules. This manual is not intended to explain the entire Multi-Net

®

system, just the 3000-Series Switch segment. For parts list, schematic diagrams, and circuit board component layout information, refer to the 3000 Series Switch Service Manual, Part No. 001-

3139-102. For more detailed information on the operation of the entire system, refer to Multi-Net Application Note, Part No. 009-3039-004CD.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

The following are brief definitions of terms and their usage as they are applied to the Switch.

1.2.1 TRUNKED SYSTEM

Refers to systems which pool multiple channels and use automatic switching so that all system users can access any repeater channel that is not in use. This results in minimum waiting to make a call.

1.2.2 LTR TRUNKED SYSTEM

The LTR

®

(Logic Trunked Radio) systems utilize a concept called trunking. Trunking makes all repeater channels on a system automatically available to the users. This is done by logic control system that continually monitors the system and updates the mobiles and repeaters using data messages. These data messages tell the mobiles which repeater channels are free and can be accessed if a call is to be made.

1.2.3 MULTI-NET TRUNKED SYSTEM

A trunking system similar to the LTR Trunked

System, but which offers a number of additional and enhanced features.

1.2.4 CONVENTIONAL SYSTEM

Refers to systems which are licensed on a single repeater channel. Operation is similar to that of a community repeater because there is no automatic access to several repeater channels.

1.2.5 3000 SERIES SWITCH

The Switch connects several forms of communication together in a “Network” that allows communication between users in the system.

1.2.6 CALL PROCESSOR

The Call Processor controls the databases for the

Switch and provides processing for certain types of calls within the system.

1.2.7 SYSTEM AND SUBSCRIBER MANAGER

The Switch along with the System and Subscriber

Manager control the Multi-Net System. The System and Subscriber Manager is an IBM

®

PC or compatible computer that is running the Johnson management program. The System and Subscriber Manager is used by the System Manager to program, control and continuously monitor Switch operation. Refer to

System and Subscriber Manager Operating Manual,

Part No. 002-3139-078CD for more information.

1.2.8 REPEATER SITE

A location where one or more repeaters are housed. Trunked system repeaters are connected to the same high-speed data bus and are required to be located close together.

1.2.9 HOME REPEATER CHANNEL

All mobiles have one site repeater channel assigned as their “Home” repeater. The Home repeater and Group ID information identifies mobiles for standard dispatch calls.

1-1

INTRODUCTION

1.2.10 STATUS REPEATER CHANNEL

The Status Repeater Channel is one repeater in a site that is designated to transmit update messages occurring on all other repeaters at the site. This repeater is available for voice traffic, but is not normally assigned as the Home repeater for any mobiles.

1.2.11 MONITOR REPEATER CHANNEL

This is the repeater channel that a mobile is currently monitoring for update messages. This repeater may be either the mobile's Home repeater or the site Status repeater. A special algorithm is used by the mobile to determine which is to be monitored.

Generally, it is the last repeater that a valid data message was detected on.

1.2.12 TELEPHONE INTERCONNECT AND

DATA TRANSMISSION

Mobile transceivers can be used to access the

Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) on the

800 and 900 MHz bands. However, this interconnect operation must be on a secondary basis to dispatch operation. An exception is when the trunked system or channel is assigned exclusively to one user. In addition, interconnect calls in a private radio service must be related to the business activities of the particular user.

The actual connection to the public telephone system may take place at any location such as the repeater or a control station. The interconnect device can be separate or shared. Timers which limit the maximum length of transmissions are not required.

However, the equipment must automatically turn off the transmitter within 3 minutes of the last transmission (except if another dispatch or interconnect call is initiated within this interval).

Data transmission and paging are also allowed on these frequencies. It also must be secondary to voice communication. Refer to applicable FCC rules and regulations for more information.

1.2.13 PUBLIC SWITCHED TELEPHONE

NETWORK (PSTN)

If interconnect calls are to be placed by mobiles or landside users to mobiles, the Switch is connected to the Public Switched Telephone Network. The specific mobiles which can place calls and other interconnect parameters are determined by how the system manager programs the Call Processor and by the programming of each mobile transceiver.

1.2.14 PRIVATE AUTOMATIC BRANCH

EXCHANGE (PABX)

The system has the ability to connect to a PABX or PBX. This allows mobile originated calls to use the dial access codes and the least cost routing facility of the PABX/PBX.

1-2

SECTION 2 3000 SERIES SWITCH


2.1 INTRODUCTION

A Multi-Net radio system is a combination of several key elements that together make up a communication system. By using the basic elements of a

Multi-Net system as building blocks, a Multi-Net system can be designed to meet the communication needs of almost any type of user. Elements of a Multi-

Net system are:

•

Backbone

This consists of repeater site equipment including the links to the Switch.

•

Control Consoles

Used for dispatch operators.

•

Switch

Provides the interface between the Backbone and

Control Consoles.

•

RF Equipment

Consists of mobiles, control stations, and handheld portables.

Each Multi-Net site is an independent trunking system that processes calls between RF units, maintains fleet partitioning, and provides priority access control. The backbone elements are interconnected by either microwave, fiber optics, RF links or private telephone lines equivalent to a 4-Wire voice grade phone circuit.

A Switch contains a Channel Interface Module

(CIM) for each repeater it controls, a Telephone Interconnect Module (TIM) for each telephone line used for interconnect calls, an Intelligent Dispatch Module

(IDM) or Multi-Net Console Module (MCM) for each dispatch console and others described in this section.

A single Switch can control up to 30 repeater channels all at one site or divided among a combination of sites

(e.g. 3-10 channel Localities on one Switch). Each repeater has an identical Switch interface/logic panel that performs the call processing for the channel. The

Switch provides interface between the Locality equipment and the control consoles and directs all activity in Multi-Net site applications.

RF units in the coverage area of one repeater site can communicate with RF units in the coverage area of other repeater sites through the Switch. Where more than 30 channels are required, multiple Switches can be used with communication between them to direct calls. Wide area radio coverage is provided to allow a mobile to talk to another mobile using a repeater hundreds of miles away. That repeater may be part of the same Multi-Net system or another Multi-Net system with phone lines or some other type of link that provides the communication path.

One or more dispatch consoles can be connected to the Switch using; direct connection, phone lines, or some other type of link. Depending on the capabilities of the particular console, the dispatcher can perform such functions as; place calls to specific mobiles, place calls to other dispatchers, and make a patch between two mobiles.

2-1


2.2 ELEMENTS OF THE SWITCH

The Switch is a rack of modules. The rack may

contain the following modules: (Table 2-1).

VDM

PTM

VTM

LEM

MAM

MCM

CPM

WAM

NetNIM

CIM

CCM

DCM

DIM

IDM

SNM

TIM

Table 2-1 SWITCH MODULES

Network Interface Module

Channel Interface Module

Conventional Channel Module

Dispatch Channel Module

Dispatch Interface Module

Intelligent Dispatch Module

System Network Module

Telephone Interface Module

Voter Diagnostics Module

Power Termination Module

Voice Tone Module

Logging Encoder Module

Multi-Net Acquisition Module

Multi-Net Console Module

Conventional Patch Module

Wide Area Module

•

•

Telephone Interface Module (TIM), to the PSTN or a PABX.

•

System Network Module (SNM), to other SNM,

Switches.

•

Network Interface Module (NetNIM), to the Call

Processor.

•

Dispatch Channel Module (DCM), to the Conventional Channel, network side.

•

Voter Diagnostics Module (VDM), to the Voter system.

•

Power Termination Module (PTM), provides fusing of power and termination for a shelf.

•

Intelligent Dispatch Module (IDM), to the Tracer

Series Dispatch Consoles.

Logging Encoder Module (LEM), interface to a logging recorder.

2.3 SWITCH MODULES (ELEMENTS)

The Switch is constructed of different modules that interface from the Switch to external devices. The modules are:

•

Channel Interface Module (CIM), to the Multi-Net or LTR System.

•

Conventional Channel Module (CCM), to a

Conventional Channel, channel side.

•

Dispatch Interface Module (DIM), to the Dispatch

Consoles.

•

Multi-Net Acquisition Module (MAM), interface from the Switch to the VR-CM50 CRT Consoles for

Tone Paging.

•

Multi-Net Console Module (MCM), to VRCM-50

CRT Consoles.

•

Conventional Patch Module (CPM), to dynamically patch a single conventional channel to a single trunked group.

•

Wide Area Module (WAM), to other WAMs,

Switches.

2-2

P

T

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

C

M

C

C

M

D

C

M

D

C

M

L

E

M

L

E

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

P

T

M

SHELF 2

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

N e t

N

N e t

N

V

T

M

V

T

M

1 2

S

N

M

S

N

M

T

I

M

T

I

M

T

I

M

T

I

M

D

I

M

I I

M

SHELF 1

M

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

D

I

M

POWER SUPPLY

Figure 2-1 2-SHELF 3000 SERIES SWITCH

P

T

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

P

T

M

SHELF 4

48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59

D

C

M

D

C

M

L

E

M

L

E

M

P

T

M

SHELF 3

32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

C

M

C

C

M

P

T

M

SHELF 2

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

N e t

N

N e t

N

V

T

M

V

T

M

1 2

S

N

M

S

N

M

T

I

M

T

I

M

T

I

M

T

I

M

D

I

M

I

M

I

M

SHELF 1

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

D

I

M

“A” POWER SUPPLY “B”



2-3

P

T

M

P

T

M

SHELF 6

80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91

SHELF 5

64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75


P

T

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

P

T

M

SHELF 4

48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59

D

C

M

D

C

M

L

E

M

L

E

M

SHELF 3

32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

P

T

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

C

M

C

C

M

P

T

M

SHELF 2

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

N e t

N

N e t

N

V

T

M

1

V

T

M

2

S

N

M

S

N

M

T

I

M

T

I

M

T

I

M

T

I

M

D

I

M

D

I

M

I

M

I

M

SHELF 1

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11


Figure 2-3 6-SHELF SWITCH RACK LAYOUT

2-4

P

T

M

P

T

M

SHELF 8

112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123

P

T

M

SHELF 7

96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107

SHELF 6

80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91

P

T

M

P

T

M

SHELF 5

64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75

W

A

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

P

T

M

D

C

M

D

C

M

L

E

M

L

E

M

M

C

M

C

P

M

C

P

M

1 2

SHELF 3

32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

P

T

M

SHELF 4

48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

C

M

C

C

M

P

T

M

N e t

N

I

M

0

SHELF 2

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

N e t

N

V

T

M

V

T

M

S

N

M

S

N

M

T

I

M

T

I

M

T

I

M

T

I

M

D

I

M

1 2

I

M

SHELF 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

D

I

M


Figure 2-4 8-SHELF SWITCH RACK SETUP

2-5




2-6

SECTION 3 ARCHITECTURE

ARCHITECTURE


The architecture of the Switch includes the modules or elements that make up the physical portions of the switch and the busses that carry data, control and voice information.

3.2 SWITCH INTERFACES

The main interfaces to the switch are as follows

(see Figure 3-1):

a. Channel Interface to Multi-Net RF b. Channel Interface to LTR Systems c. Channel Interface to Conventional Channels d. Interface with Dispatch Consoles e. Interface with the Public Switched Telephone

Network f. Interface to other Switches g. Interface to the Call Processor

MULTI-NET a

CIM DCM d

LTR

CONVENTIONAL

CHANNEL b c

CIM

S

W

I

T

C

H

TIM

CCM

WAM

SNM

NetNIM g e f

CALL

PROCESSOR

DISPATCH

PSTN

OTHER

SWITCHES

Figure 3-1 MULTI-NET SYSTEM SWITCH

3-1

ARCHITECTURE

INTRA-TERMINAL DATA BUS (IDB)

CALL

PROCESSOR

NETWORK

INTRA-TERMINAL

DATA BUS

(NetIDB)

NETWORK

CHANNEL

STATUS BUS

(NetCSB)

NetNIM

NETWORK

INTERFACE

MODULE

SYSTEM

AND

SUBSCRIBER

MANAGER

CHANNEL INTERFACE BUS

(CIB)


(CIB)

DISPATCH INTERFACE BUS

(DIB)

LOGGING RECORDER

CHANNEL

INTERFACE

MODULE

CIMs

CONVENTIONAL

CHANNEL

MODULE

CCMs

DISPATCH

INTERFACE

MODULE

DIMs

DISPATCH

CHANNEL

MODULE

DCMs

LOGGING

ENCODER

MODULE

LEMs

ETHERNET

BUS

WIDE

AREA

MODULE

WAMs

CHANNEL STATUS BUS (CSB)

Figure 3-2 DATA BUSES

PSTN OR PABX

TELEPHONE

INTERFACE

MODULE

TIMs

SYSTEM

NETWORK

MODULE

SNMs

SYSTEM NETWORK BUS (SNB)

3.3 BUS STRUCTURE

The modules in the system are connected by various busses as described in the following sections.

3.3.1 DATA BUS

• Ethernet Bus

The Ethernet Bus is a broadcast networking technology that can use several different physical media, including twisted-pair cable and coaxial cable. The

Ethernet bus connects multiple Call Processors and the System and Subscriber Manager together using

TCP/IP for communication. This allows the Call

Processors and the System and Subscriber Manager to pass information to keep each other up to date. The bus passes data for Subscriber Management,

Subscriber Registration, and Switch Configuration

Management.

•

Network Intra-Terminal Data Bus (NetIDB)

A 19200 baud sync-escape protocol bus that passed information from the Call Processor to and from other modules via the NetNIM.

•

Network Channel Status Bus (NetCSB)

A 19200 baud Sync-escape protocol bus that passes the CSB data to the Call Processor or external peripheral equipment via the NetNIM.

•

•

•

•

Intra-Terminal Data Bus (IDB)

A 19200 baud sync-escape protocol bus that modules communicate on to pass control information to each other using high speed CSMA.

•

Channel Status Bus (CSB)

A 19200 baud sync-escape protocol bus that passes channel status from channel modules to other system modules using high speed Carrier Sense

Multiple Access (CSMA).

Channel Interface Bus (CIB)

A 1200 baud sync-escape protocol bus that passes system channel control and status to and from the CIM.

System Network Bus (SNB)

A 1200 baud sync-escape protocol bus that passes control and status between SNMs.

PSTN or PABX

Connects to a PSTN (Public Switch Telephone

Network) or a PABX (Private Automatic Branch

Exchange) for outgoing and incoming telephone calls.

3-2

ARCHITECTURE

3.3.2 CONTROL BUS

The following are descriptions of control buses.

Refer to Figure 3-3.

1. The IDB Idle/Collision line is a three level line that indicates if the line is idle, busy or collision occurred for the IDB communication process. This provides for high speed CSMA of the IDB.

2. The CSB Idle/Collision line is a three level line that indicates if the line is idle, busy or collision occurred for the CSB communication process. This provides high speed CSMA of the CSB.

INTRA-TERMINAL DATA BUS (IDB) IDLE / COLLISION

NetNIM

NETWORK

INTERFACE

MODULE

CHANNEL

INTERFACE

MODULE

CIMs

CONVENTIONAL

CHANNEL

MODULE

CCMs

WIDE

AREA

MODULE

WAMs

LOGGING

ENCODER

MODULE

LEMs

TELEPHONE

INTERFACE

MODULE

TIMs

SYSTEM

NETWORK

MODULE

SNMs

DISPATCH

INTERFACE

MODULE

DIMs

CHANNEL STATUS BUS (CSB) IDLE / COLLISION

DISPATCH

CHANNEL

MODULE

DCMs

Figure 3-3 CONTROL BUSES

3-3

VTM

VOICE

TONE

MODULE

ARCHITECTURE

VOICE TONE MODULE BUS

TX/RX PCM

CHANNEL

INTERFACE

MODULE

CIMs

CONVENTIONAL

CHANNEL

MODULE

CCMs

WIDE

AREA

MODULE

WAMs

DISPATCH

CHANNEL

MODULE

DCMs

MASTER SYNC / MASTER CLOCK

Figure 3-4 VOICE BUSES

LOGGING

ENCODER

MODULE

LEMs

SYSTEM

NETWORK

MODULE

SNMs

TELEPHONE

INTERFACE

MODULE

TIMs

3.3.3 VOICE BUS

The following are descriptions of voice buses.

Refer to Figure 3-4.

1. VTM Bus

A 2.048 MHz Pulse Code Modulated (PCM) bus containing 32 slots of tones or voice the modules use to indicate call progress to an end user by means of audio information.

2. Tx PCM BUS

A 2.048 MHz Pulse Code Modulated (PCM) bus containing 32 slots. Audio received from the RF channel is transmitted on these slots by the channel modules and received by the other system modules.

3. Rx PCM Bus

A 2.048 MHz Pulse Code Modulated (PCM) bus contains 32 slots. Audio is transmitted from the other system modules to these slots and received by the channel modules to be transmitted on the RF channel.

4. Master Sync

Provides the synchronization signal for the PCM bus communication to begin the frame of 32 PCM slots.

5. Master Clock

Provides the 2.048 MHz clocking signal for the

PCM buses.

3-4

ARCHITECTURE

SPECIFICATIONS

SYSTEM RACK

Dimensions

Environment

Average Power

19" W x 31" D x 83.5" H

0

°

C to 50

°

C (32

°

F to 122

°

F) at 20% to 80% humidity (noncondensing)

72 Modules x 5.1W ÷ 0.7 (efficiency) = 525W

525W x 3.6 = 1890 Btu/Hr Average Heat

Weight

MODULES

Dimensions

Weight

11.5" W x 8" H (8.6" including extractors)

0.95 lbs. (module only)

1.47 lbs. (module with Personality Card)

0

°

C to 50

°

C (32

°

F to 122

°

F) at 20% to 80% humidity (noncondensing) Environment

Maximum Power and Current +5V DC at 0.65A = 3.25W

+12V DC at 0.1A = 1.2W

-12V DC at 0.05A = 0.6W

-48V DC at 0.03A = 1.44W (TIM-DID only)

Total Power (less TIM-DID) = 5.05W

Total Power (with TIM-DID) = 6.49W

Maximum Power (with TIM-DID) = 8.0W

SYSTEM and SUBSCRIBER MANAGER

Computer

Dimensions

Weight

Power and Current

CRT

Dimensions

Weight

Power and Current

Environment

21.3" W x 18.7" D x 6.4" H

45 pounds

115V AC at 8A or 230V AC at 5A

14.1" W x 15.3" D x 14.7" H

35 pounds

120V AC at 2A or 240V AC at 1.5A

10

°

C to 40

°

C (50

°

F to 104

°

F) at 20% to 80% humidity (noncondensing)

3-5


ARCHITECTURE

3-6

SECTION 4 SYSTEM RACK

SYSTEM RACK

4.1 TWO SHELF 3000 SERIES SWITCH

The system rack is a framework for modules that consists of up to two shelves with thirteen slots per shelf. In each shelf, twelve slots are for function modules and one slot is reserved for the power module. The power supplies for the shelves are located in the lower portion of the rack framework.

The framework also provides support for interconnection wiring, routed between shelves, and external devices.

4.1.1 POWER CONSUMPTION

The following tables shows the average voltage, current and power for each supply voltage per card

(based on loading of 24 cards).

Table 4-1 AVERAGE VOLTAGE/CURRENT/

POWER

Voltage

+5V DC

Current

0.50A

+12V DC

-12V DC

-48V DC 0.03A*

Total

* DIDs only.

0.10A

0.05A

Power

2.50W

1.20W

0.60W

1.44W

5.74W

Total watts including TIM-DID is 5.74W.

Excluding the TIM-DID provides a total of 4.3W for normal modules. The total wattage of the terminal is found by multiplying the wattage of a module by the number of modules.

Total Watts x No. of Modules = Terminal Power

The wattage required by the power supply is found by dividing the total wattage of the terminal by the efficiency of the power supply (0.7).

Terminal Power

÷

0.7 = Wattage of Power Supply

The BTUs per hour are found by multiplying a known value (3.6) by the wattage required by the power supply.

3.6 x Wattage of Power Supply = Btu/Hr.

EXAMPLE:

4.3W x 12 = 51.6W

51.6W

÷

0.7 = 73.7W

3.6 x 73.7W = 265 Btu/Hr

4.1.2 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED

1. Digital Multimeter, voltmeter resolution to 0.001V.

2. Transmission test set, HP 3551A.

3. IBM NT compatible computer, with Call Processor

Software.

4. Two CIMs (023-3039-035)

4-1

SYSTEM RACK

4.1.3 TWO SHELF POWER SUPPLY

The Power Supply has a 115/230V AC 50/60 Hz input and 4 continuous duty outputs as follows:

+5V DC 24A.

-5V DC 6A.

+12V DC 3A.

-12V DC 5A.

The power supply can handle 2-shelves and has the following connections:

4 separate +5V 2A connections.

2 separate -5V connections.

2 separate +12V connections.


6 separate ground connections.

4.1.4 POWER SUPPLY REDUNDANT PLATE

The power supply drawer can be made redundant by the use of the redundant diode plate (PN 023-

3039-553). The redundant plate allows two power supply drawers to share the load via diodes. One of the power supply drawers may be removed and the remaining drawer will supply the full load. (See

Figure 4-10.)

Table 4-2 POWER SUPPLY CONNECTIONS

TB1

Term 1

Term 2

Term 3

TB2

Term 1

Term 2

Term 3

Term 4

Term 5

Term 6

Term 7

Term 8

Term 9

W1

W2

W6

NC

W7

W4

W5

W3

W8

W1

W1

W1

Wire

No.

Color

Blk

Wht

Grn

AC (Hot)

AC (Ntrl)

AC (Gnd)

Red

Red

Blu

Blu

Blu

Wht

Grn

Blu

+5V

+5V

Gnd

Gnd

+12V

-12V

-5V

Gnd

F1

F1

Gnd

Gnd

F3

F4

F2

Gnd

From

Line

Line

Line

4.1.5 VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENTS

See Figure 4-10 for location of components and

Table 4-2 for wire connections.

1. Connect a voltmeter to U1, pin 76 on an RVM (DO

NOT use an extender card).

2. Adjust the +5V pot on the power supply for a reading of 5.1V.

3. If +5.1V cannot be obtained, change R84 to a 5.6k ohm 1/4W resistor.

4.1.6 REDUNDANT SUPPLY ADJUSTMENTS



1. Remove the AC voltage to one of the supplies.



3. Adjust the +5V pot for a reading of 5.1V. (If +5.1V cannot be obtained, change R84 to a 5.1k ohm 1/4W resistor.)

4. Connect a voltmeter to output of CR3 and verify that the -5V line is -4.8V to -5.2V. (If not, make

R68 lower to raise voltage.)

5. Remove the AC voltage to the adjusted supply and connect AC voltage to the other power supply.




8. Connect a voltmeter to output of CR3 and verify that the -5V line is -4.8V to -5.2V. (If not, make

R68 lower to raise voltage.)

4.1.7 VERIFY FAN AIR FLOW DIRECTION

1. Connect the power cables to a 110V AC source.

4-2

SYSTEM RACK

2. Connect the Plus lead of the Fan Cable to Bus Bar

D1-16.

3. Verify both power supplies are turned OFF.

(Power Supply "A", is located on the left side at the bottom of the rack. Power Supply "B" is located on the right side at the bottom of the rack.)

4. Install both power supplies.

5. Turn Power Supply "A" on.

6. Verify that the Power On indicator is "ON" for

Power Supply "A".

7. Verify that the air flow from the fan is to the outside.

4.1.8 VERIFY VOLTAGES ON POWER DISTRI-

BUTION CABLE

1. Verify voltages in Table 4-13 for the Power

Termination Cables for Shelves 1-6.

2. Turn Power Supply "A" OFF.

4.1.9 SYSTEM TEST PROCEDURE

The following test procedure is for the Switch with six Power Termination Modules (PTMs), one

Network Interface Module (NetNIM) and one Voice

Termination Module (VTM).

1. Install all Power Termination Cables onto the backplane at mating connector P33.

2. Unplug all modules from the backplane card slots

(leave unplugged modules in the card guides).

3. Verify the installation of the PCM W1 and W3

cables as shown in Table 4-14 (see Figure 4-5).

Table 4-4 PCM CABLE LOCATION

From

Shelf 1 - J25

Shelf 1 - J5

Shelf 1 - J6

Shelf 1 - J23

Shelf 1 - J24

Shelf 2 - J5

Shelf 2 - J6

Shelf 2 - J23

Shelf 2 - J24

Table 4-3 POWER DISTRIBUTION CABLE

VOLTAGES

Pin

13

14

15

9

10

11

12

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

Color

Black

Red

Blue

Black

Red

Blue

Black

Green

Not Used

Black

White

Not Used

Black

Red

Not Used

-48V ±2V

None

Common

-12V ±1V

None

Common

+5V +0.5/-0.1V

+12V ±1V

Common

+5V +0.5/-0.1V

+12V ±1V

Common

+5V +0.5/-0.1V

+12V ±1V

Common

Shelf 1 - J26

Shelf 2 - J3

Shelf 2 - J4

Shelf 2 - J25

Shelf 2 - J26

Shelf 3 - J3

Shelf 3 - J4

Shelf 3 - J25

Shelf 3 - J26

To

4-3

SYSTEM RACK

Table 4-5 S1 SWITCH SETTINGS

Shelf Number

13

14

15

16

9

10

11

12

17

18

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

Switch 1, Open Sections

ALL Closed

1

2

1,2

3

1,3

2,3

1,2,3

4

1,4

2,4

1,2,4

3,4

1,3,4

2,3,4

1,2,3,4

5

1,5

Shelf S1 Switch Settings

Verify switch settings of S1 in Table 4-15 for

each shelf address (see Figure 4-5).

Backplane Switch Settings

Verify the backplane switch settings for S2 - S8 on each shelf are set with all sections closed.

PTM Switch Settings

Verify the switch settings of the Power Termination Module (PTM) are as follows:

S5, S7 all sections closed;

S6, S8 section 8 closed; sections 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 open

Call Processor Connection To Switch

Verify the Call Processor connection to the

System rack as follows:

1. NetIDB Connection: Use the 20’ RS-232 cable to connect Shelf 1-J100 to Port 1 of the Call Processor computer.

2. NetCSB Connection: Use the 20’ RS-232 cable to connect Shelf 1-J101 to Port 2 of the Call Processor computer.

3. Install a Power Termination Module in the first slot on the left side of each shelf.

4. Install the NetNIM in Shelf 1, Slot 0.

5. Turn "On" both Power Supplies, turn "On" the Call

Processor and note that the four LEDs on each PTM card are "On".

a. Verify that the Call Processor comes up in the

Switch mode.

b. Verify that the Call Processor displays the Net-

NIM’s clock status, "A Pass B Pass" in the Call

Processor’s Device Activity window. If necessary, press the reset button S1on the NetNim to activate the clock status.)

PCM Bank Verification

PCM Bank Verification requires two Channel

Interface Modules (CIMs).

1. On both CIMs place a patch cord from the top jack

of J1 to the top jack of J2 (see Figure 10-1).

2. Close S1, sections 3-4; open sections 1-2 on each module.

3. On both CIMs set switch sections as follows:

Switch Section

S3 1-2 open; 3-4 closed

S4

S5

1-2 closed; 3-4 open

1-2-3-4 closed.

4. Set one module for System Test "5"

(S5-sections 1 and 3 open; sections 2 and 4 closed).

Place this module in any slot on Shelf 1.

5. Set the second module for System Test "6".

(S5-sections 2-3 open; 1-4 closed). Place this module in any slot on Shelf 2.

6. Loop Primary Tx PCM to the Primary Rx PCM by connecting a cable (023-3039-842) from Shelf 1-J3

to Shelf 1-J4 (see Figure 4-5).

4-4

SYSTEM RACK

7. The modules display an "A" if the PCM bank is good. Press S2 to reset the module if "A" is not displayed.

•

A failure on the primary displays a "1" on one or both modules.

•

A failure on the secondary displays a "2" on one or both modules.

8. After the PCM bank has proven good, force failures on both the primary and secondary as follows:

Primary

•

Remove cables on Shelf 1, J5 and J6.

•

A "1" on both modules indicates a Primary failure.

•

Reconnect the cables.

Secondary

•


•

A "2" on both modules indicates a Secondary failure.

•


•

Remove the cable from Shelf 1, J3 to J4.

9. Remove CIMs from rack and patch cords from

J1-J2.

VTM PCM Bank Verification

This requires the use of one CIM and one VTM1.

1. Verify the VTM1 card is in Shelf 1-slot 2.

2. On the VTM1 connect a Transmission Test Set to

TP1 and TP2 (common).

3. On the VTM1 set S2 to select the 1020 Hz alignment tone. The tone should be heard in the Test Set speaker. Adjust the monitor volume as necessary.

4. Set the CIM for System Test "1".

(S5, section 1 open; sections 2,3,4 closed.)

5. Place the module in any slot on Shelf 1.

6. Connect a Transmission Test Set with the common lead in CIM connector J13.

•

Verify -3 dBm

±

0.5 dB at TP3

(adjust R83 if necessary).

•

Verify -12 dBm

±

0.5 dB at J12


7. Move the module to a slot on Shelf 2.

•

Verify -3 dBm

±

0.5 dB at TP3.

•

Verify -12 dBm

±

0.5 dB at J12

8. Set the CIM to System Test "0".

(S5 all sections closed.)

9. Remove the CIM from the rack.

4.1.10 FINAL CONFIGURATION VERIFICATION

NOTE: Make sure both power supplies are turned

OFF.

1. Disconnect AC Power Cables from AC power source.

2. All PTMs should be installed and configured as follows:

Switch Sections Closed Sections Open

S5, S7

S6, S8

1 - 8

8 1,2,3,4,5,6,7

3. Select one of the Backplane boards for measuring.

Measurements can be made on any of the

64-pin connectors on the Backplane selected.

4. All measurements should be referenced to ground

(pins 9, 10, 41 or 42) unless otherwise noted.

5. All test readings should be within 5% of the following specifications:

Pins

16/48

17/49

18/50

19/51

20/52

21/53

22/54

23/55

24/56

* Pins 11, 12, 43 or 44.

Ohms

37.5

37.5

37.5

75.0

37.5

37.5

100 (measured to +5V DC*)

37.5


4-5

SYSTEM RACK

6. On the top Backplane board, the following measurements should be referenced to ground (pins 9, 10, 41 or 42).

Center Pin of

J5

J6

J23

J24

Ohms

37.5

37.5

19.2

19.2

NOTE: The four readings should be ±1 ohm from the test specifications.

7. Test is completed.

SHELF 2

J5

J3

J6

J4

J23

J25

J24

J26

J2 J1

P33

J22

SHELF 1

NIM SHELF

J22

J5

J3

J6

J4

J23

J21

J24

J25 J26

J2 J1

J20

J21 J20

POWER SUPPLY

P33

Figure 4-1 2-SHELF 3000 SERIES SWITCH BACKPLANE CABLES

P

T

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

C

M

C

C

M

D

C

M

D

C

M

L

E

M

L

E

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

P

T

M

SHELF 2

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

N e t

N

N e t

N

V

T

M

1

V

T

M

2

S

N

M

S

N

M

T

I

M

T

I

M

T

I

M

T

I

M

D

I

M

I

M

I

M

SHELF 1

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

D

I

M

POWER SUPPLY

Figure 4-2 2-SHELF 3000 SERIES SWITCH SETUP

4-6

SYSTEM RACK

4.2 FOUR SHELF 3000 SERIES SWITCH

The system rack is a framework for modules that consists of up to 4-shelves with 13-slots per shelf. In each shelf, 12-slots are for function modules and

1-slot is reserved for the power module. The power supplies for the shelves are located in the lower portion of the rack framework. The framework also provides support for interconnection wiring, routed between shelves, and external devices.





POWER

Voltage

+5V DC

+12V DC

-12V DC

Current

0.50A

0.10A

0.05A

-48V DC 0.03A*

Total

* DIDs only.

Power

2.50W

1.20W

0.60W

1.44W

5.74W





Terminal Power

÷




EXAMPLE:

4.3W x 48 = 206W

206W

÷

0.7 = 295W

3.6 x 295W = 1,061 Btu/Hr


•

Digital Multimeter, voltmeter resolution to 0.001V.

• Transmission test set, HP 3551A.

•

IBM NT compatible computer, with Call Processor

Software.

•

Two CIMs (023-3039-035).

4.2.3 4-SHELF POWER SUPPLY

The Power Supply has a 115/230V AC 50/60 Hz input and 4 continuous duty outputs as follows:

+5V DC 24A.

-5V DC 6A.

+12V DC 3A.

-12V DC 5A.

The power supply can handle 2-shelves and has the following connections:

4 separate +5V 2A connections.


2 separate +12V connections.


6 separate ground connections.

4.2.4 POWER SUPPLY REDUNDANT PLATE

The power supply drawer can be made redundant by the use of the redundant diode plate (PN 023-3039-

553). The redundant plate allows two power supply drawers to share the load via diodes. One of the power supply drawers may be removed and the remaining

drawer will supply the full load (see Figure 4-10).

4-7

SYSTEM RACK

Table 4-7 POWER SUPPLY CONNECTIONS

TB1

Term 1

Term 2

Term 3

TB2

Term 1

Term 2

Term 3

Term 4

Term 5

Term 6

Term 7

Term 8

Term 9

W1

W2

W6

NC

W7

W4

W5

W3

W8

W1

W1

W1

Wire

No.

Color

Blk

Wht

Grn

AC (Hot)

AC (Ntrl)

AC (Gnd)

Red

Red

Blu

Blu

Blu

Wht

Grn

Blu

+5V

+5V

Gnd

Gnd

+12V

-12V

-5V

Gnd

F1

F1

Gnd

Gnd

F3

F4

F2

Gnd

From

Line

Line

Line

5. Remove the AC voltage to the adjusted supply and connect AC voltage to the other power supply.




8. Connect a voltmeter to output of CR3 and verify that the -5V line is -4.8V to -5.2V. (If not, make R68 lower to raise voltage.)

4.2.5 VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENTS





2. Adjust the +5V pot on the power supply for a reading of 5.1V.

3. If +5.1V cannot be obtained, change R84 to a 5.6k ohm 1/4W resistor.

4.2.6 REDUNDANT SUPPLY ADJUSTMENTS



1. Remove the AC voltage to one of the supplies.




4. Connect a voltmeter to output of CR3 and verify that the -5V line is -4.8V to -5.2V. (If not, make R68 lower to raise voltage.)

4.2.7 VERIFY FAN AIR FLOW DIRECTION



D1-16.






Power Supply "A".



BUTION CABLE

1. Verify voltages in Table 4-13 for the Power Termi-

nation Cables for Shelves 1-6.

2. Turn Power Supply “A” OFF.

4-8

SYSTEM RACK


VOLTAGES

Pin

13

14

15

9

10

11

12

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

Color

Black

Red

Blue

Black

Red

Blue

Black

Green

Not Used

Black

White

Not Used

Black

Red

Not Used

-48V ±2V

None

Common

-12V ±1V

None

Common

+5V +0.5/-0.1V

+12V ±1V

Common

+5V +0.5/-0.1V

+12V ±1V

Common

+5V +0.5/-0.1V

+12V ±1V

Common


From

Shelf 1 - J25

Shelf 1 - J5

Shelf 1 - J6

Shelf 1 - J23

Shelf 1 - J24

Shelf 2 - J5

Shelf 2 - J6

Shelf 2 - J23

Shelf 2 - J24

Shelf 3 - J5

Shelf 3 - J6

Shelf 3 - J23

Shelf 3 - J24

Shelf 4 - J5

Shelf 4 - J6

Shelf 4 - J23

Shelf 4 - J24

Shelf 1 - J26

Shelf 2 - J3

Shelf 2 - J4

Shelf 2 - J25

Shelf 2 - J26

Shelf 3 - J3

Shelf 3 - J4

Shelf 3 - J25

Shelf 3 - J26

Shelf 4 - J3

Shelf 4 - J4

Shelf 4 - J25

Shelf 4 - J26

Shelf 5 - J3

Shelf 5 - J4

Shelf 5 - J25

Shelf 5 - J26

To











Shelf Number

13

14

15

16

9

10

11

12

17

18

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2


Switch 1, Open Sections

ALL Closed

1

2

1,2

3

1,3

2,3

1,2,3

4

1,4

2,4

1,2,4

3,4

1,3,4

2,3,4

1,2,3,4

5

1,5




Verify the backplane switch settings for S2 - S8 on each shelf are set as follows:

Shelf 1-4 section 1 closed sections 2,3,45,6,7,8 open

4-9

SYSTEM RACK



S5, S7 section 1 closed; sections 2,3,4,5,6,7,8 open

S6, S8 sections 1,2,6 closed; sections 3,4,5,7,8 open











Switch mode.


NIM’s clock status, "A Pass B Pass" in the Call





1. On both CIMs place a patch cord from the top jack



3. On both CIMs set switch sections as follows:

Switch Section


S4

S5


1-2-3-4 closed.









• A failure on the primary displays a "1" on one or both modules.

• A failure on the secondary displays a "2" on one or both modules.

8. Repeat this procedure by moving the module on

Shelf 4 to Shelf 3. Reset both modules if “A” is not displayed.


Shelf 3 to Shelf 2. Reset both modules if "A" is not displayed.

10.After the PCM bank has proven good, force failures on both the primary and secondary as follows:

Primary

• Remove cables on Shelf 1, J5 and J6.

•


•


Secondary

• Remove cables on Shelf 1, J23 and J24.

•


•


• Remove the cable from Shelf 1, J3 to J4.

4-10

SYSTEM RACK

11. Remove CIMs from rack and patch cords from

J1-J2.




2. On the VTM1 connect a Transmission Test Set to


3. On the VTM1 set S2 to select the 1020 Hz alignment tone. The tone should be heard in the Test Set speaker. Adjust the monitor volume as necessary.





•

Verify -3 dBm

±

0.5 dB at TP3


•

Verify -12 dBm

±

0.5 dB at J12



•

Verify -3 dBm

±

0.5 dB at TP3.

•

Verify -12 dBm

±

0.5 dB at J12


•

Verify -3 dBm

±

0.5 dB at TP3.

•

Verify -12 dBm

±

0.5 dB at J12


•

Verify -3 dBm

±

0.5 dB at TP3.

•

Verify -12 dBm

±

0.5 dB at J12

10.Set the CIM to System Test “0”.


11. Remove the CIM from the rack.



OFF.



Switch Sections Closed

S5, S7 2,5,6,7

S6, S8 2,5,6

Sections Open

1,3,4

1,3,4,7,8

3. Select one of the six Backplane boards for measuring. Measurements can be made on any of the 64-pin connectors on the Backplane selected.




Pins

16/48

17/49

18/50

19/51

20/52

21/53

22/54

23/55

24/56

Ohms

37.5

37.5

37.5

75.0

37.5

37.5


37.5


* Pins 11, 12, 43 or 44.

6. On the top Backplane board, the following measurements should be referenced to ground (pins

9, 10, 41 or 42).

Center Pin of

J5

J6

J23

J24

Ohms

37.5

37.5

19.2

19.2


7. Test is complete.

4-11

SHELF 4

J5

J3

J6 J23

J4 J25

J24

J26

J2 J1

P33

J22

SHELF 3

J5

J3

J6 J23

J21

J24

J2 J1

J4 J25 J26

J20

P33

J22

SHELF 2

J5

J3

J6 J23

J21

J24

J2 J1

J4 J25 J26

J20

P33

J22

SHELF 1

NIM SHELF

J22

J5

J3

J6 J23

J21

J24

J4 J25 J26

J2 J1

J20

J21 J20

P33

POWER SUPPLY

Figure 4-3 4-SHELF 3000 SERIES SWITCH BACKPLANE CABLES

P

T

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

P

T

M

SHELF 4

48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59

D

C

M

D

C

M

L

E

M

L

E

M

P

T

M

SHELF 3

32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

C

M

C

C

M

P

T

M

SHELF 2

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

N e t

N

N e t

N

V

T

M

1

V

T

M

2

S

N

M

S

N

M

T

I

M

T

I

M

T

I

M

T

I

M

D

I

M

I

M

I

M

SHELF 1

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

D

I

M

POWER SUPPLY

Figure 4-4 4-SHELF 3000 SERIES SWITCH SETUP

SYSTEM RACK

4-12

SYSTEM RACK

4.3 SIX SHELF 3000 SERIES SWITCH







POWER

Voltage

+5V DC

+12V DC

-12V DC

Current

0.50A

0.10A

0.05A

-48V DC 0.03A*

Total

* DIDs only.

Power

2.50W

1.20W

0.60W

1.44W

5.74W


Terminal Power

÷




EXAMPLE:

4.3W x 72 = 310W

310W

÷

0.7 = 443W

3.6 x 443W = 1,595 Btu/Hr


1. Digital Multimeter, voltmeter resolution to 0.001V.

2. Transmission test set, HP 3551A.

3. IBM NT compatible computer, with Call Processor

Software.

4. Two CIMs (023-3039-035)




Table 4-12 BUS BAR RESISTANCE

Ohm Meter Lead Positions

From To

Bus Bar A1-A2 Chassis/Frame

Bus Bar A1-A2 B1-B2 Black

Bus Bar A1-A2 C1-C2 Red

Bus Bar A1-A2 D1 Blue

Bus Bar A1-A2

Bus Bar A1-A2

C1-C2 Red

D1-Blue

E1-White

E1

F1

D1

E1

F1

White

Green

Blue

White

Green

Resistance in

Ohms

Infinite

0

Infinite

Infinite

Infinite

Infinite

Infinite

Infinite

Infinite

4-13

SYSTEM RACK

4.3.3 VERIFY RESISTANCE OF BUS BAR AND

POWER SUPPLY LINES

1. Verify the Power Cables are not connected to a power source.

2. Verify the Power Supplies are not installed in the

Power Supply shelf.

3. Measure the resistance from point-to-point and

verify the resistance as shown in Table 4-12.


BUTION CABLE





VOLTAGES

Pin

13

14

15

9

10

11

12

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

Color

Black

Red

Blue

Black

Red

Blue

Black

Green

Not Used

Black

White

Not Used

Black

Red

Not Used

-48V ±2V

None

Common

-12V ±1V

None

Common

+5V +0.5/-0.1V

+12V ±1V

Common

+5V +0.5/-0.1V

+12V ±1V

Common

+5V +0.5/-0.1V

+12V ±1V

Common

4.3.4 VERIFY COOLING FAN AIR FLOW DIREC-

TION



D1-16.






Power Supply "A".











4-14

SYSTEM RACK


From

Shelf 1 - J25

Shelf 1 - J5

Shelf 1 - J6

Shelf 1 - J23

Shelf 1 - J24

Shelf 2 - J5

Shelf 2 - J6

Shelf 2 - J23

Shelf 2 - J24

Shelf 3 - J5

Shelf 3 - J6

Shelf 3 - J23

Shelf 3 - J24

Shelf 4 - J5

Shelf 4 - J6

Shelf 4 - J23

Shelf 4 - J24

Shelf 5 - J5

Shelf 5 - J6

Shelf 5 - J23

Shelf 5 - J24

Shelf 1 - J26

Shelf 2 - J3

Shelf 2 - J4

Shelf 2 - J25

Shelf 2 - J26

Shelf 3 - J3

Shelf 3 - J4

Shelf 3 - J25

Shelf 3 - J26

Shelf 4 - J3

Shelf 4 - J4

Shelf 4 - J25

Shelf 4 - J26

Shelf 5 - J3

Shelf 5 - J4

Shelf 5 - J25

Shelf 5 - J26

Shelf 6 - J3

Shelf 6 - J4

Shelf 6 - J25

Shelf 6 - J26

To


Shelf Number

13

14

15

16

9

10

11

12

17

18

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

Switch 1, Open Sections

ALL Closed

1

2

1,2

3

1,3

2,3

1,2,3

4

1,4

2,4

1,2,4

3,4

1,3,4

2,3,4

1,2,3,4

5

1,5






Shelf 1-6 sections 2,5,6,7,8 closed sections 1,3,4 open



S5, S7 sections 2,5,6,7 closed; sections 1,3,4 open

S6, S8 sections 2,5,6 closed; sections 1,3,4,7,8 open











Switch mode.


NIM’s clock status, “A Pass B Pass” in the Call

4-15

SYSTEM RACK





1. On both CIMs place a patch cord from the top jack



3. On both CIMs set switch sections as follows:

Switch Section


S4

S5


1-2-3-4 closed.









•

A failure on the primary displays a "1" on one or both modules.

•

A failure on the secondary displays a "2" on one or both modules.





10.Repeat this procedure by moving the module on




12.After the PCM bank has proven good, force failures on both the primary and secondary as follows:

Primary

•


•


•


Secondary

•


•


•


•


13.Remove CIMs from rack and patch cords from

J1-J2.




2. On the VTM1 connect a Transmission Test Set to


3. On the VTM1 set S2 to select the 1020 Hz alignment tone. The tone should be heard in the Test Set speaker. Adjust the monitor volume as necessary.




4-16

SYSTEM RACK


•

Verify -3 dBm

±

0.5 dB at TP3


•

Verify -12 dBm

±

0.5 dB at J12



•

Verify -3 dBm

±

0.5 dB at TP3.

•

Verify -12 dBm

±

0.5 dB at J12


•

Verify -3 dBm

±

0.5 dB at TP3.

•

Verify -12 dBm

±

0.5 dB at J12


•

Verify -3 dBm

±

0.5 dB at TP3.

•

Verify -12 dBm

±

0.5 dB at J12

10.Move the module to a slot on Shelf 5.

•

Verify -3 dBm

±

0.5 dB at TP3.

•

Verify -12 dBm

±

0.5 dB at J12


•

Verify -3 dBm

±

0.5 dB at TP3.

•

Verify -12 dBm

±

0.5 dB at J12

12.Set the CIM to System Test "0".


13.Remove the CIM from the rack.



OFF.



S5, S7 2,5,6,7

S6, S8 2,5,6

Sections Open

1,3,4

1,3,4,7,8

3. Select one of the six Backplane boards for measuring. Measurements can be made on any of the





Pins

16/48

17/49

18/50

19/51

20/52

21/53

22/54

23/55

24/56

Ohms

37.5

37.5

37.5

75.0

37.5

37.5


37.5


* Pins 11, 12, 43 or 44.


Center Pin of

J5

J6

J23

J24

Ohms

37.5

37.5

19.2

19.2


7. Test is complete.


4-17

SHELF 6

A7

023-3039-842

J5

J3

J22

SHELF 5

J5

J3

A4

STANDARD SHELF

J6

J4

J6

J23

J25

J23

J24

J26

J2 J1

J21

J24

J2 J1

A6

023-3039-841

J20

P33

J4 J25 J26 P33

J22 J21 J20

597-3003-295 023-3039-870

SHELF 4

J5

J3

J6 J23

J4 J25

J24

J26

J2 J1

P33

J22

SHELF 3

J5

J3

J21

J6

J4

J23

J25

J24

J26

J2 J1

J20

P33

J22 J21 J20

597-3003-295

023-3039-870

SHELF 2

J5

J3

J6 J23

J4 J25

J24

J2 J1

J26 P33

J22

SHELF 1

NIM SHELF

J22

J5

J3

J6

J4

J23

J21

J24

J25 J26

J2 J1

J20

J21 J20

“A”

POWER SUPPLY

“B”

P33

Figure 4-5 SIX SHELF 3000 SERIES SWITCH BACKPLANE CABLES

SYSTEM RACK

4-18

P

T

M

P

T

M

SHELF 6

80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91

SHELF 5

64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75

P

T

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

P

T

M

SHELF 4

48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59

D

C

M

D

C

M

L

E

M

L

E

M

SHELF 3

32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

P

T

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

C

M

C

C

M

P

T

M

SHELF 2

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

N e t

N

N e t

N

V

T

M

1

V

T

M

2

S

N

M

S

N

M

T

I

M

T

I

M

T

I

M

T

I

M

D

I

M

I

M

I

M

SHELF 1

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

D

I

M


Figure 4-6 SIX SHELF 3000 SERIES SWITCH SETUP

4-19

SYSTEM RACK

SYSTEM RACK

4.4 EIGHT SHELF 3000 SERIES SWITCH







POWER

Voltage

+5V DC

+12V DC

-12V DC

Current

0.50A

0.10A

0.05A

-48V DC 0.03A*

Total

* DIDs only.

Power

2.50W

1.20W

0.60W

1.44W

5.74W





Terminal Power

÷




EXAMPLE:

4.3W x 96 = 413W

413W

÷

0.7 = 590W

3.6 x 590W = 2,123 Btu/Hr


•

Digital Multimeter, voltmeter resolution to

0.001V.

•

Transmission test set, HP 3551A.

•

IBM NT compatible computer, with NetSMM

Call Processing Software.

•

Two CIMs (023-3039-035)

4.4.3 VERIFY RESISTANCE OF BUS BAR AND

POWER SUPPLY LINES

1. Verify the Power Cables are not connected to a power source.

2. Verify the Power Supplies are not installed in the

Power Supply shelf.

3. Measure the resistance from point-to-point and

verify the resistance as shown in Table 4-17.

Table 4-17 BUS BAR RESISTANCE

Ohm Meter Lead Positions

From To

Bus Bar A1-A2 Chassis/Frame

Bus Bar A1-A2 B1-B2 Black

Bus Bar A1-A2 C1-C2 Red

Bus Bar A1-A2 D1 Blue

Bus Bar A1-A2

Bus Bar A1-A2

C1-C2 Red

D1-Blue

E1-White

E1

F1

D1

E1

F1

White

Green

Blue

White

Green

Resistance in

Ohms

Infinite

0

Infinite

Infinite

Infinite

Infinite

Infinite

Infinite

Infinite

4-20

SYSTEM RACK

4.4.4 VERIFY COOLING FAN AIR FLOW

DIRECTION



D1-16.






Power Supply "A".



VOLTAGES

Pin

13

14

15

9

10

11

12

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

Color

Black

Red

Blue

Black

Red

Blue

Black

Green

Not Used

Black

White

Not Used

Black

Red

Not Used

-48V ±2V

None

Common

-12V ±1V

None

Common

+5V +0.5/-0.1V

+12V ±1V

Common

+5V +0.5/-0.1V

+12V ±1V

Common

+5V +0.5/-0.1V

+12V ±1V

Common


BUTION CABLE





The following test procedure is for the 3000

Series Switch with:

8 - Power Termination Modules (PTMs)

1 - Network Interface Module (NetNIM)

1 - Voice Termination Module (VTM).







Shelf 4 - J5

Shelf 4 - J6

Shelf 4 - J23

Shelf 4 - J24

Shelf 5 - J5

Shelf 5 - J6

Shelf 5 - J23

Shelf 5 - J24

Shelf 6 - J5

Shelf 6 - J6

Shelf 6 - J23

Shelf 6 - J24

Shelf 7 - J5

Shelf 7 - J6

Shelf 7 - J23

Shelf 7 - J24

From

Shelf 1 - J25

Shelf 1 - J5

Shelf 1 - J6

Shelf 1 - J23

Shelf 1 - J24

Shelf 2 - J5

Shelf 2 - J6

Shelf 2 - J23

Shelf 2 - J24

Shelf 3 - J5

Shelf 3 - J6

Shelf 3 - J23

Shelf 3 - J24

Shelf 1 - J26

Shelf 2 - J3

Shelf 2 - J4

Shelf 2 - J25

Shelf 2 - J26

Shelf 3 - J3

Shelf 3 - J4

Shelf 3 - J25

Shelf 3 - J26

Shelf 4 - J3

Shelf 4 - J4

Shelf 4 - J25

Shelf 4 - J26

Shelf 5 - J3

Shelf 5 - J4

Shelf 5 - J25

Shelf 5 - J26

Shelf 6 - J3

Shelf 6 - J4

Shelf 6 - J25

Shelf 6 - J26

Shelf 7 - J3

Shelf 7 - J4

Shelf 7 - J25

Shelf 7 - J26

Shelf 8 - J3

Shelf 8 - J4

Shelf 8 - J25

Shelf 8 - J26

To

4-21

SYSTEM RACK





Shelf Number

13

14

15

16

9

10

11

12

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

21

22

23

24

17

18

19

20


ALL Closed

1

2

1,2

3

1,3

2,3

1,2,3

4

1,4

2,4

1,2,4

3,4

1,3,4

2,3,4

1,2,3,4

5

1,5

2,5

1,2,5

3,5

1,3,5

2,3,5

1,2,3,5



Shelf 1-8 Sections 3,4,5,6,8 closed

Sections 1,2,7 open



S5, S7 Sections 3,4,5,6,7 closed;

Sections 1,2 open

S6, S8 Sections 2,3,6 closed;

Sections 1,4,5,7,8 open




1. NetIDB Connection: Use the 20’ RS-232 cable to connect Shelf 1-J100 to Port-1 of the Call Processor computer.

2. NetCSB Connection: Use the 20’ RS-232 cable to connect Shelf 1-J101 to Port-2 of the Call Processor computer.


4. Install the NetNIM in Shelf-1, Slot-0.




Switch mode.


NIM’s clock status, “A Pass B Pass” in the Call

Processor’s Device Activity window. (If necessary, press the reset button S1on the NetNIM to activate the clock status.)


PCM Bank Verification requires 2-Channel Interface Modules (CIMs).

1. On both CIMs place a patch cord from the top jack


2. On both CIMs

Close S1, Sections 3-4

Open S1, Sections 1-2

3. On both CIMs set switch sections as follows:

Switch Section

S3

S4

S5

1-2 open; 3-4 closed


1-2-3-4 closed.

4-22

SYSTEM RACK

4. Set one CIM for System Test "5"

(S5-Sections 1-3 open; Sections 2-4 closed). Place this module in any slot on Shelf 1.

5. Set the second CIM for System Test "6".

(S5-Sections 2-3 open; 1-4 closed). Place this module in any slot on Shelf 8.



7. The CIMs display an "A" if the PCM bank is good.

Press S2 to reset the CIM if "A" is not displayed.

a. A failure on the primary displays a "1" on one or both CIMs.

b. A failure on the secondary displays a "2" on one or both CIMs.

•

Move the CIM on Shelf 8 to Shelf 7.

Reset both CIMs if "A" is not displayed.

•



•



•



•



•



3. After the PCM bank has proven good, force failures on both the primary and secondary as follows:

Primary

•


•

A "1" on both CIMs indicates a Primary failure.

•


Secondary

•


•

A "2" on both CIMs indicates a Secondary failure.

•


•


4. Remove both CIMs from rack and patch cords from

J1-J2.


This requires the use of 1-CIM and 1-VTM1.


2. On the VTM1 connect a Transmission Test Set to


3. On the VTM1 set S2 to select the 1020 Hz alignment tone. The tone should be heard in the Test Set speaker. Adjust the monitor volume as necessary.

4. On the CIM, set all Sections for System Test "1".

(S5, Section 1 open; Sections 2,3,4 closed.)

5. Place the CIM in any open slot on Shelf 1.

6. On the CIM, connect a Transmission Test Set with the common lead in connector J13.

a. Verify -3 dBm

±

0.5 dB at TP3


b. Verify -12 dBm

±

0.5 dB at J12


3. Move the CIM to an open slot on Shelf 2.

•

Verify -3 dBm

±

0.5 dB at TP3.

•

Verify -12 dBm

±

0.5 dB at J12

4. Move the module to a open slot on Shelves 3-8 and verify the levels in Step 7.

5. Set the CIM to System Test "0".


6. Remove the CIM form the rack.



OFF.


4-23

SYSTEM RACK



S5, S7 3,4,5,6,7

S6, S8 2,3,6

Sections Open

1,2

1,4,5,7,8

3. Select one of the 8 Backplane boards for measuring.

Measurements can be made on any of the





Pins

16/48

17/49

18/50

19/51

20/52

21/53

22/54

23/55

24/56

* Pins 11, 12, 43 or 44.

Ohms

37.5

37.5

37.5

75.0

37.5

37.5


37.5



Center Pin of

J5

J6

J23

J24

Ohms

37.5

37.5

19.2

19.2


7. Test is completed.

Disconnect the cables from the Call Processor.

4-24

SHELF 8

J5

A7

023-3039-842

J3

J22

SHELF 7

J5

J3

A4

STANDARD SHELF

J6

J4

J23

J25

J6 J23

J21

J24

J4 J25 J26

J24

J26

J2 J1

J2 J1

A6

023-3039-841

J20

P33

P33

SHELF 6

J22

J5

J3

J6

J4

J23

J25

J21

J24

J26

J2 J1

J20

P33

J22

SHELF 5

J5

J3

J6

J4

J23

J21

J24

J25 J26

J2 J1

J20

J22

SHELF 4

J5

J3

J21

J6

J4

J23 J24

J25 J26

J2 J1

J20

P33

P33

J22

SHELF 3

023-3039-842

J22

SHELF 2

J5

J3

J5

J3

J6

J4

J23

J21

J24

J2 J1

J25 J26

J20

P33

023-3039-841

J20

J6

J4

J23

J25

J21

J24

J26

J2 J1

P33

J22

SHELF 1

NIM SHELF

J22

J5

J3

J6

J4

J23

J21

J24

J25 J26

J2 J1

J20

J21 J20

“A”

POWER SUPPLY

“B”

P33

Figure 4-7 EIGHT SHELF 3000 SERIES SWITCH BACKPLANE CABLES

4-25

SYSTEM RACK

P

T

M

P

T

M

SHELF 8

112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123

SHELF 7

96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107

P

T

M

SHELF 6

80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91

P

T

M

P

T

M

SHELF 5

64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75

W

A

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

P

T

M

D

C

M

SHELF 4

48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59

D

C

M

L

E

M

L

E

M

P

T

M

SHELF 3

32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

C

M

C

C

M

P

T

M

SHELF 2

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

N e t

N

N e t

N

V

T

M

1

V

T

M

2

S

N

M

S

N

M

T

I

M

T

I

M

T

I

M

T

I

M

D

I

M

I I

M

SHELF 1

M

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

D

I

M


Figure 4-8 8-SHELF 3000 SERIES SWITCH RACK SETUP

4-26

SYSTEM RACK

SYSTEM RACK

BACKPLANE P33

SHELF 2

GND

GND

GND

GND

+5V

+12V

+12V

GND

-48V

-12V

+5V

+5V

9

12

15

11

14

3

6

1

4

7

10

13

BACKPLANE P33

SHELF 1

9

12

15

11

14

3

6

7

10

13

1

4

-48V

-12V

+5V

+5V

+5V

+12V

+12V

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

(POWER SUPPLY HARNESS PN 023-3139-105)

AC IN (LOAD)

AC IN (GND)

AC (NEUTRAL)

P1

10

7

11

3

2

9

6

8

5

4

1

12

POWER SUPPLY POSITION “B”

OUTPUT 1


AC IN (LOAD)

AC IN (GND)

AC (NEUTRAL)

P1

10

7

4

1

12

11

8

5

9

6

3

2

POWER SUPPLY POSITION “A”

OUTPUT 2

Figure 4-9 2-4 SHELF POWER SUPPLY INTERCONNECT

4-27

BUS BAR

ASSEMBLY

DELTRON POWER SUPPLY

POSITION “B”

+5V SENSE (RED)

+12V SENSE (BLUE)

+12V (BLUE)

+12V RETURN (BLACK)

+5V SENSE RETURN (WHITE/VIOLET)

J2

1

2


POWER FAIL (ORANGE)

6

8

10

11

3

4

5

F

G

D

E

H

A

B

C

-48V RETURN (BLACK)

-48V (GREEN)

POWER FAIL/

OUTPUT GOOD RETURN

A4

A5

A6

A1

A2

A3

+5V/+12V RETURN

+5V/+12V RETURN

+5V/+12V RETURN

+5V

+5V

+5V

+12V

+12V

TB2

B4

B5

B6

B1

B2

B3 OUTPUT GOOD (YELLOW)

25

P2

A

13

23

24

F

G

H

D

E

B

C

AC IN (GND)

AC IN (LOAD)

A1

AC (NEUTRAL) A2

A3

A4

AC IN (LOAD)

A5

AC (NEUTRAL)

A6

AC IN (GND)

BUS BAR

ASSEMBLY

TB2

B1

B2

B3

B4

B5

B6

+5V SENSE (RED)

C

D

E

A

B

F

G

H

J1

23

24

25

+12V SENSE (BLUE)

+12V (BLUE)

+12V RETURN (BLACK)

-48V RETURN (BLACK)

-48V (GREEN)



POWER FAIL (ORANGE)

1

2

3

4

5

6

8

10

11

POWER FAIL/

OUTPUT GOOD RETURN

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

+5V/+12V RETURN

+5V/+12V RETURN

+5V/+12V RETURN

+5V

+5V

+5V

+12V

+12V

TB2

B1

B2

B3

B4

B5

B6

OUTPUT GOOD (YELLOW)

13

P1

A

B

F

G

H

C

D

E

REDUNDANT POWER SUPPLY


POSITION “A”

Figure 4-10 6-8 SHELF POWER SUPPLY INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM

4-28

SYSTEM RACK

SECTION 5 CALL PROCESSOR

CALL PROCESSOR


The Call Processor controls the databases for the

Switch and provides processing for certain types of calls within the system. The Call Processor consists of the following:

•

Large Multi-Net Controller (PN 558-3000-126)

•

10 MHz 4-port RS-232 Assembly

(PN 558-3000-122)

•

Call Processor Software (PN 023-9998-180).

5.2 DATA BUSES

The Call Processor connects to the system via five different RS-232 ports. The SMB and SSB connect the Call Processor to the Switch via the

Network Interface Module (NetNIM). The MAB,

RGB and RMB connect the Call Processor to ancillary

equipment of the overall system. Refer to Figure 5-1.

1. Net Intra-Terminal Data Bus (NetIDB)

The NetIDB is a 9600 baud full duplex port connected to the Network Interface Module

(NetNIM). The NetNIM buffers the Call Processor data to the Intra-Terminal Data Bus (IDB). The Call

Processor communicates with the rest of the Switch modules on the IDB via the NetNIM.

2. Net Channel Status Bus (NetCSB)

The NetCSB is a 9600 baud single data path that receives data from the NetNIM to the Call

Processor. This data is a “snap shot” of the channel activity from the Channel Status Bus (CSB) within the Switch, collected and buffered by the NETNIM and sent once every two seconds. This information may be used by an external device to determine subscriber air time usage. The NetCSB data protocol and format are available upon request.

CALL

PROCESSOR

NETWORK

INTRA-TERMINAL

DATA BUS

(NetIDB)

NETWORK

CHANNEL

STATUS BUS

(NetCSB)

NetNIM

NETWORK

INTERFACE

MODULE

ETHERNET

BUS



(CIB)


(CIB)

LOGGING RECORDER

CHANNEL

INTERFACE

MODULE

CIMs

CONVENTIONAL

CHANNEL

MODULE

CCMs

WIDE

AREA

MODULE

WAMs

LOGGING

ENCODER

MODULE

LEMs

PSTN OR PABX

TELEPHONE

INTERFACE

MODULE

TIMs

SYSTEM

NETWORK

MODULE

SNMs

DISPATCH

CHANNEL

MODULE

DCMs




5-1

CALL PROCESSOR

5.3 CALL PROCESSOR CONTROL

The Call Processor controls several different databases and secondary functions of the Switch. The following are some of the major functions of the Call

Processor.

5.3.1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

The system configuration provides for initialization of modules and database management. When a module sends an initialization request to the Call

Processor, the Call Processor searches the configuration database and sends initialization information to the module. If the module number is not found, the

Call Processor creates an alarm and places the module in standby mode.

The specific parameters for each module are contained in the database. Both configuration's database and Switch-to-site setup is viewed or modified and the channel configuration's loading time is set.

The system analyzer parameters may be viewed and modified. The system loading may be viewed. The total configuration database is stored and retrieved from hard disk or floppy disk.

5.3.2 MANUAL DEVICE CONTROL

The manual device control allows the operator to do the following:

1. Restart single or multiple modules

2. Enable/disable a module from operation

3. Read/write to memory of modules or devices

4. Set date/time.

5. Turn on/off the alarm records storage, activity log, and screen saver functions

6. Change password.

7. Change the system title of the SMM.

8. Control the receiver voter functions.

9. Control the system analyzer operator by site.

5.3.3 SUBSCRIBER MANAGEMENT

The Subscriber Management allows an operator to view, set or modify the Home/Group IDs and the

Unique IDs permissions. Unique IDs may be controlled for suspend audio, and selective unit disable

(kill).

The Dynamic Reassignment of Unique IDs can be controlled from the Call Processor. A Unique ID may be moved to a new System and Group or it may have the programmable group of a system set to a new group.

This function allows the following:

1. A Unique ID to be interrogated.

2. The current ID being used on each channel to be displayed by the operator.

3. Access for each user for Group and Unique IDs can be set or viewed for RMF control.

4. Passwords for each user may be assigned for RMF control.

The file management for the above databases is done by storing and retrieving the files from the hard disk or floppy disk.

5.3.4 ACTIVITY LOG UTILITIES

The system operator can use the Call Processor keyboard to enter information messages. The Call

Processor monitor activity window displays alarms and information for the current day's log and history files. The activity log contains a time stamp of when the activity occurred.

5.3.5 CALL COMPLETION

The call completion function handles database management of trunk assignments and telephone number assignments. The trunk assignments may be viewed, set, stored or retrieved on both hard disk and floppy disk. The telephone numbers are viewed and assigned Unique IDs and the telephone assignment database is stored and retrieved on the hard disk and floppy disk.

5-2

CALL PROCESSOR

5.3.6 KEYBOARD LOCK

The system operator has the ability to lock the keyboard by password control to prevent the unauthorized use of the Call Processor. The password is a single level of control.

5.3.7 LOG OUT/LOG IN

This function allows the operator to log out of

Call Processor thereby locking the keyboard from unauthorized usage. Once the Call Processor has been logged out, the function becomes Log In. The log in function will ask for a password. If the password is not correct, access is denied.

5.4 ALARM CONTROL

The alarm control is where errors are time stamped and passed to the activity log function and the message accounting output function.

5.5 SYSTEM ANALYZER

The Call Processor has the ability to perform an analysis on the system. This is a complete handshake

(interrogation) of a test mobile in the RF coverage of sites. This verifies the correct operation of the system to and from the mobile. The analysis includes all links including the antenna systems and RF coverage. The system analyzer has the ability to automatically disable channels from the system that do not pass the analysis.

5.6 CALL PROCESSING

The Call Processor processes Unique ID calls, telephone calls and group site calls (see Call Sequence

Appendix B). Normal dispatch call processing is handled independently in the associated modules.

The Call Processor determines if an originated

Unique ID call is to be automatically routed or not and routes the call to the appropriate facility, i.e. DIM or

SNM. The destination Unique ID call is processed by the Call Processor to determine routing to a DIM or

CIM. Both origination and destination calls are accounted for and a message accounting record is generated.

The dialed digits of an incoming telephone call determine the Unique ID requested and the Call

Processor routes the call to where the Unique ID is registered. The Call Processor determines if the

Unique ID on an outgoing call has the proper permission for the digits dialed, selects the proper trunk, and creates a message accounting message.

The group site call is routed to the site selected on origination and creates a message accounting record.

The Call Processor uses the information from the

SSB to validate the use of the system for audio on

Home repeater channel, Group ID sets and Unique

IDs. If an unauthorized user is detected, the Call

Processor intervenes and disconnects the audio being transmitted from the modules or mobiles.

5-3


CALL PROCESSOR

5-4

NETWORK INTERFACE MODULE (NetNIM)

SECTION 6 NETWORK INTERFACE MODULE (NetNIM)

6.1 DESCRIPTION

The NetNIM interfaces the Call Processor to the internal communication of the Switch. The NetNIM passes data communication via a 19200 baud full duplex channel on the Intra-Terminal Data Bus (IDB) to the Network Intra-terminal Data Bus (NetIDB) at

19200 baud. The NetNIM also passes data between the Channel Status Bus (CSB) to the Network

Channel Status Bus (NetCSB).

The Master Clock and Master Sync for the PCM busses are redundant in the NetNIM. A detection circuit monitors the two different sets and if Master

Clock-A is off frequency, Master Clock-B is activated. If both -A and -B are off frequency, an alarm is sent to the Call Processor and the NetNIM removes both sets from distribution in the Switch.

The Switch is allowed a Master and Slave

NetNIM, enabled or disabled from operation on the data communication path. The master tells the slave when both of its clocks are off frequency and the slave clock is distributed, if the slave clocks are on frequency.

6.2 OPERATION

The NetNIM may be redundant using a master and slave module. The master is placed in a card slot with the least significant bit equal to zero. The slave is placed in a card slot with the least significant bit equal to one. The NetNIM Master/Slave LED is ON for master and OFF for slave.

The card slot(s) used for the NetNIM has the backplane wired for this operation. Refer to Section

23 for further details.

CALL

PROCESSOR

NETWORK

INTRA-TERMINAL

DATA BUS

(NetIDB)

NETWORK

CHANNEL

STATUS BUS

(NetCSB)

NetNIM

NETWORK

INTERFACE

MODULE

ETHERNET

BUS



(CIB)


(CIB)

LOGGING RECORDER

CHANNEL

INTERFACE

MODULE

CIMs

CONVENTIONAL

CHANNEL

MODULE

CCMs

WIDE

AREA

MODULE

WAMs

LOGGING

ENCODER

MODULE

LEMs

PSTN OR PABX

TELEPHONE

INTERFACE

MODULE

TIMs

SYSTEM

NETWORK

MODULE

SNMs

DISPATCH

CHANNEL

MODULE

DCMs


Figure 6-1 DATA BUS BLOCK DIAGRAM


6-1


6.2.1 LEDS

1. Clock A and B LED

Clock A/B LED is on for clock A and off for clock B.

2. Companion Clock LED

The companion clock LED is on if the companion card indicates a malfunction or if the companion card is not installed. Otherwise, the clock(s) are functioning and the LED is off.

3. Comm to SMM LED

The Comm to SMM LED is on if the NIM is the selected unit to communicate to the SMM. Otherwise, the LED is off.

4. Alarm LED

The Alarm LED is on if there is a NIM failure.

This is presently done on power-up if there is a RAM or ROM malfunction.

6.3 SETUP PROCEDURE

6.3.1 JUMPERS

J11 and J12 select the Tx/Rx direction of the SSB lines. J13 and J14 select the Tx/Rx direction of the

SMB lines. (See Figure 6-3.)

6.3.2 SWITCHES

S1 - Reset

Normally open, press to reset. Momentary switch used to reset the module.

6.4 ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS

The NetNIM alignment ensures the correct PCM

Clock and Sync frequencies and sets the frequency detectors.

1. Measure the frequency of clock "A" at TP31 with a

10 MHz counter.

2. Adjust C62 for 4.096 MHz ± 200 Hz at TP31.

3. Measure the frequency of U30, pin 1 for 4 kHz ± 0.25

Hz

.

4. Measure the frequency of clock "B" at J32 with a 10

MHz counter.

5. Adjust C65 for 4.096 MHz ± 200 Hz at TP32.

6. Measure the frequency of U29, pin 1 for 4 kHz ± 0.25

Hz.

Table 6-1 NIM JUMPERS

J11

J12

J13

J14

NetCSB

J15

NetIDB

J16

Jumpers

1 to 2

1 to 2

1 to 2

1 to 2

Pins

1 to 2

3 to 4

5 to 6

7 to 8

9 to 10

PROM Addressing

J24-pin 1 to J25-pin 1


1 to 2

3 to 4

5 to 6

7 to 8

9 to 10

Pins

Pins

NetCSB Rx

NetCSB Tx

NetIDB Rx

NetIDB Tx

Baud Rate

19200

Bus

9600 (normal)

4800

2400

1200

Baud Rate

19200

9600 (normal)

4800

2400

1200

Addressing

27256

(normal)

27128 J24-pin 1 to J25-pin 1


J24-pin 1 only


Watch-Dog Timer Operation

2764

J26 - Not used, jumper is placed on J26-pin 1

only for normal operation.

DCB/CSB Data Bus Select

J33 pin 1 to pin 2

Data Bus

Switch CSB (normal) pin 2 to pin 3 ACS

6-2


6.4.1 DETECTOR SETTING

For this alignment use a DC voltmeter with a

0.001V resolution.

1. Measure the voltage between TP34 and TP36.

2. Adjust R93 for 0V ± 0.005V.

3. Check U31, pins 1 and 2 for < 0.8V.

4. Measure the voltage between TP33 and TP35.

5. Adjust R75 for 0V ± 0.005V.

6. Check U31, pin 13 and 14 for < 0.8V.

7. Check U37, pin 6 for, 0.8V.

INJECTOR/

EXTRACTOR

MASTER/SLAVE (YEL)

CLOCK A/B (YEL)

COMPANION CLOCK (GRN)

COMM TO SMM (YEL)

ALARM (RED)

POWER (GRN)

INJECTOR/

EXTRACTOR

6-3

Figure 6-2 NetNIM CARD EDGE LAYOUT


1 2 3 J33

64/128

256

128/256

Figure 6-3 NetNIM ALIGNMENT POINTS DIAGRAM

6-4

R93

R75

BASIC BOARD MODULE (BBM)

SECTION 7 BASIC BOARD MODULE (BBM)

7.1 DESCRIPTION

The Basic Board Module (BBM) is the mother board of the following modules:

• Dispatch Interface Module (DIM)

• Intelligent Dispatch Module (IDM)

• Dispatch Channel Module (DCM)

• Channel Interface Module (CIM)

• Telephone Interface Module (TIM)

• System Network Module (SNM)

• Conventional Channel Module (CCM)

• Logging Encoder Module (LEM)

•

Voter Diagnostic Module (VDM)

• Multi-Net Console Module (MCM)

• Conventional Patch Module (CPM)

•

Wide Area Module (WAM)

7.1.1 MAIN AUDIO

The main external audio connection is via RXA

±

,

P1, pins 31 and 32, and TXA

±

, P1, pins 63 and 64.

These connections go to P33. This allows the personality cards to intercept the lines. When a 2-Wire connection is required on a module, it enters the card via the RXA

±

connection. The personality card then intercepts the signal on P33, pins 2 and 4. The receive and transmit buffers are connected to the personality card via P33 also. Refer to the Basic Board Module

block diagram, Figure 7-1.

7.1.2 SECONDARY COMMUNICATION

There is a secondary communication connection to the BBM. This is used to pass data information to and from an external device, i.e. the Multi-Net Logic

Module (MLM), another SNM, etc. These connections are the RXS

±

, P1, pins 27 and 28, and TXS

±

, P1, pins 59 and 60. There are two forms of communication on these lines, digital and audio frequency shift keyed data. The form of communication is determined by the switch setting of S3 and S4.

These modules are made up of the BBM plus the appropriate software and personality cards as required.

The BBM uses four wire audio to connect to the external equipment. There is an additional connection for secondary data transmission.

7.1.3 INTERNAL COMMUNICATION

There are several switch selections for the proper internal routing and use of the audio. This occurs via switch S1 and J27. There are several internal communication buses that are selected for operation of the microprocessor. These include both data and audio buses.

7-1


Figure 7-1 BASIC BOARD MODULE BLOCK DIAGRAM

7-2


7.2 BBM SETUP PROCEDURE

Refer to the Tables in this section for switch settings, jumper placements and the backplane wire

harness description. Also refer to Section 23 for more

information on the backplane.

7.2.1 SWITCH SETTINGS

Refer to the Basic Board Module alignment

points diagram Figure 7-2 for the location of these

switches.

7.2.2 JUMPER PLACEMENT

Refer to the Basic Board Module alignment

points diagram Figure 7-2 for the location of these

jumpers.

7.2.3 BBM BACKPLANE EXTERNAL

CONNECTIONS

See the Backplane Section 23 for pin-outs on the

shelf backplane and wire harness pin-outs.

Table 7-1 BASIC BOARD SWITCH SETTINGS

S w Sec

S1 1

2

3

4

S2

S3 1

2

3

4

S4 1

2

3

4

S5 1

2

3

4

Description

AFSK Data Receive Secondary Line

AFSK Data Receive Main Audio Input

Voice from main board

AFSK Data Receive from PCM

Resets the microprocessor

AFSK Secondary Transmit Data +

AFSK Secondary Transmit Data -

Digital Secondary Transmit Data ground

Digital Secondary Transmit Data signal

Digital Secondary Receive Data signal

Digital Secondary Receive Data ground

AFSK Secondary Receive Data +

AFSK Secondary Receive Data -

Bit 0 - Alignment Test Switch

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

JU

Table 7-2 BASIC BOARD JUMPER

Pin

PLACEMENT

Description

J24 1 to 2

2 to 3*

J27 1 to 2

2 to 3*

P33 1 to 2*

3 to 4*

5

6

J36 1 only*

1 to 2

2 to 3

Not Used

Normal operation

Not Used

No ALC

No personality card attached

No personality card attached open open

Not used

-48V E-lead operation


J14

J15

J21

J22

Jumper pin 1 to 2 for high impedance ground path for split 600 ohm inputs and outputs. Leave open if no ground path desired.

* Normal setting.

Table 7-3 BACKPLANE PIN-OUTS

Backplane

P34 to P45 Description pin 25 pin 26 pin 27 pin 28 pin 29 pin 30 pin 31 pin 32

Test Tx Data

Test Rx Data

Sec Rx +

Sec Rx -

EA lead

EB lead main Rx

Audio, Tip +

Main Rx

Audio, Ring _

P-Odd J1,3,5,7 pin 1 pin 2 pin 3 pin 4 pin 5 pin 6 pin 7 pin 8

Wire Harness

RxS+

RxS-

EA

EB

RxA+

RxApin 1 pin 2 pin 3 pin 4 pin 5 pin 6 pin 57 pin 58 pin 59 pin 60 pin 61 pin 62 pin 63 pin 64

Alarm

Alarm

Sec Tx +

Sec Tx -

MA lead

MB lead

Main Tx

Audio +

Main Tx

Audio -

P-Even J2,4,6,8 pin 1 pin 2 pin 3 pin 4 pin 5 pin 6 pin 7

TxS+

TxS-

MA

MB

TxA+ pin 1 pin 2 pin 3 pin 4 pin 5 pin 8 TxApin 6

7-3


7.3 BBM ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES

7.3.1 INTRODUCTION

The module is designed to operate at a maximum input level and maintain that level without added distortion or noise levels significantly different from the maximum input level. The overall distortion should be less than 5% with noise less than -45 dB, Cmessage weighted. Adjustments at the maximum level are difficult due to possible higher distortion and clipping of the signal, therefore, an average level is used for alignment. A voice application typically uses an average level that is -12 dB from the maximum level. When the module(s) are pre-aligned with the -

12 dB average level, the only adjustment necessary is to set the input and output levels to the -12 dB level.

The module contains operational amplifier stages with gain that require the absolute alignment level to be lowered by the gain of the op amp stage. The module op amp stages have a +9 dBm output swing.

Since the alignment level is -12 dB from maximum, the absolute average alignment level would be -3 dBm for a unity gain op amp stage.

The module contains a PCM CODEC chip that converts the analog audio to digital and back to analog. The maximum input of the codec is +6 dBm absolute level since there is a gain of 3 dB in the circuitry and the output stage can handle +9 dBm absolute level. The +6 dBm input level requires the average alignment level to be lower than a -6 dBm absolute level.

7.3.2 ALIGNMENT

The basic module is pre-aligned with a tone of

1004 Hz at -12 dBm with a 600 ohm driving impedance. The -12 dBm level is verified by measuring the level across the interface with a high impedance balanced AC voltmeter. The main audio levels of the module relative to the input are adjusted to provide pre-alignment.

1. Set the module for pre-alignment. Refer to the

Alignment Points Diagram Figure 7-2.

a. Inject 1004 Hz at -12 dBm at EQU of Rx input J1.

b. Jumper J27, pin 2 to pin 3.

c. No personality card attached with P33, pin 1 jumpered to pin 2 and pin 3 jumpered to pin 4.

d. Close S1, section 3.

e. Open S1, sections 1, 2 and 4.

f. Set S5 for test 1, open section 1; close sections

2, 3, and 4.

g. Reset the module, press S2 and release.

2. Main Rx Audio input level from J1.

a. Setup for alignment as in Step 1.

b. Adjust R41 to -6 dBm ± 0.5 dB at J11.

c. Verify the level at TP5 of the CODEC to be

-6 dBm ± 1 dB.

3. Main Rx to FSK input from J1.


b. Close S1, section 2.

c. Adjust R102 for -12 dBm ± 1 dB at TP8.

d. Open S1, section 2.

4. Main Tx Audio output level from J1.


b. Adjust R83 for a -6 dBm ± 0.5 dB at TP3.

c. Adjust R44 for a -12 dBm ± 0.5 dB at J12.

5. FSK Output a. Set S5 for test 8. Close sections 1, 2 and 3, Open section 4.

b. Reset the module, Press S2 and release.

7-4

BASIC BOARD MODULE (BBM) c. Adjust R90 for -12 dBm ± 0.5 dB at TP9.

d. Adjust R86 for -12 dBm ± 0.5 dB at TP4.

e. Verify the level at J12 to be -21 dBm ± 1 dB.

6. Normal Operation a. Set S5 to 0 (normal operation). Close section 1, 2,

3 and 4.


c. Remove the input alignment tone from J1.

7.4.4 SYSTEM SWITCH EQUALS "4"

1. Sends an FSK message out the main transmit.

2. Receives the message on the main receive.

3. Sends a digital message out the secondary transmit.

4. Receives the message on the secondary receive.

5. Closes the M-lead and receives the E-lead input.

6. If display shows: a. "A" - all three tests passed.

b. "1" - main test failed.

c. "2" - secondary test failed.

d. "3" - M-lead/E-lead test failed.

7.4 TEST TASKS

The following are the eight available tests with the Test Switch S5 and the functions the module performs. These tests can be used for additional verification of a module and the system.


1. Connects the System Alignment Tone on the VTM

Bus to the Transmit Audio.

2. Close the telephone line relays to connect to the telephone line.


1. Turns on the TXDTMF gate.

2. Programs the tone remote personality card for 2175

Hz at maximum level.

3. Turns on the tone to the main transmit line.


1. Turns on the TXDTMF gate.

2. Programs the tone remote personality card for

DTMF.

3. Sends the tone out the main transmit.


1. Sends an FSK message on both the main and secondary transmit PCMs in Slot 31.

2. Receives a message on both the main and secondary receive PCMs in Slot 0.

3. If display shows: a. "A" - both receive messages passed.

b. "1" - main receive message failed.

c. "2" - secondary receive message failed.


1. Sends an FSK message on both the main and secondary transmit PCMs in Slot 0.


7-5


3. If display shows: a. "A" - both receive messages passed.

b. "1" - main receive message failed.

c. "2" - secondary receive message failed.


1. Closes the relays on the telephone line personality card to connect the telephone line and the Silent Slot of the VTM Bus to the main transmit audio.


1. Turns on the FSK transmit for the 1200 Hz tone.

2. Turns on the FSR gate to the main transmit audio.


1. This allows the TIM-DID to answer an incoming call and to provide a System Alignment Tone to the telephone line. This allows the DID to have the hybrid adjust circuit tuned.

7.5 TROUBLESHOOTING

This section provides some basic hardware troubleshooting procedures. These procedures follow the

Test Tasks (See Section 7.4).

7.5.1 TEST "1"

System Alignment Tone Test.

1. The Test Tone of 1004 Hz should be -3 dBm

±

1 dB at U19, pin 2 (CODEC IC).

2. The tone should pass through op amp U32A. Adjust

R83 for a level of -6 dBm

±

0.5 dB at TP3.

3. The tone should pass through transmission gate

U31B with less than 0.25 dB of loss. This gate should have a high on U31B, pin 5 (control pin), from U46A, pin 1.

The transmission gates U30A, U30B, U31D,

U31C, U57C and U31A should be off ( < 1V on the control pins). U46, pins 5, 3, 9, 11 and 13 should be low ( < 1V). U6, pin 15 should be high, > 4.5V.

4. The tone should pass through the op amp 600 ohm line drivers, U28A and U28B. Adjust R44 for a level of -12 dBm

±

1 dB at J12. The level should be

-12 dBm

±

1 dB across the Tx line.

TIM With DID Personality Card (-660)


±




±

0.5 dB at TP3.




±

1 dB at J12.

5. The tone should pass through P33, pins 5 and 6 to the personality card to R263 and transformer T201, pins 10 and 9, via the jumper. Relay K204 should be active

( < 1V on pin 8), U208, pin 16 should be high ( >

4.5V).

6. The audio should pass through to the line with a level of -12 dBm

±

2 dB across a series 600 ohm and

2.2 microfarad capacitor.

TIM With 2WY Personality Card (-670)


±




±

0.5 dB at TP3.



7-6



±

1 dB at J12.

5. The tone should pass P33, pins 5 and 6 to the personality card to transformer T201, pins 9 and 10 via the jumper.

•

Relay K204 should be active ( < 1V on pin 8)

•

Latch U208, pin 16 should be high ( > 4.5V)

•


•


•


•


•

Relay K201, K205 and K206 should be inactive

( > 11V on pin 2 and 8 of each)

•

Latch U208, pins 14/15/19 should be low (< 1V).

6. The audio should pass through to the line with a level of -12 dBm

±

2 dB across a series 600 ohm and

2.2 microfarad capacitor.

4. The tone should pass through the op amp 600 ohm line drivers, U28A and U28B.

•

Adjust R44 for a level of -1 dBm

±

1 dB at J12.

•

The level should be -1 dBm

±


7.5.3 TEST "3"

This sends a DTMF digit "5" tone from the Tone

Remote Personality Card (-420) to the line.

1. The DTMF digit is generated on the -420 board by

U218.

•

The digit passes through adjustment op amp

U201A.

•


±

0.5 dB at EP223.

•

This passes through summing op amp U201C and to the main board via STXA P202, pin 2.

2. The digit passes through transmission gate U31A.

•

This gate control pin (U31A, pin 13) should be high, from U46, pin 13.

•

The tone should pass through the op amp 600 ohm lines drivers, U28A and U28B.

•


±

1 dB at J12.

•

The level should be -12 dBm,

±


7.5.2 TEST "2"

This sends 2175 Hz tone from the Tone Remote

Personality Card (-420) to the line.

1. The 2175 Hz tone is generated on the -420 board by

U209, U212 and U213. The tone is passed through buffer op amp U204B and the major level control

U214A and U214B.

2. The 2175 Hz tone passes through adjustment op amp U204A.

•

Adjust R267 for a level of +8 dBm

±

0.5 dB at

EP226.

•

This passes through summing op amp U201C and to the main board via STXA P202, pin 2.

3. The 2175 Hz tone pass through transmission gate

U31A.

•

This gate should have a high on the control pin

(U31A, pin 13), from U46, pin 13.

•

The transmission gates U30A, U30B, U31D, U31C,

U57A and U31B should be off (< 1V on the control lines).

•

U46, pins 1, 3, 5, 9, 11 and 13 should be low ( < 1V).

U6, pin 15 should be high ( > 4.5V).

7.5.4 TEST "4"

This tests the card for sending and receiving data messages via FSK on the Main Audio and via digital on the Secondary Data lines. The M-lead and E-lead circuitry is tested.

1. Sends an FSK message out the main transmit.

•

The FSK is generated by U16, then passes through level op amp U32B.

•


±

0.5 dB at TP4.

•

The FSK then passes through transmission gate

U31C and balanced line driver op amps U28A and

U28B.

•


±

1 dB at J12.

•


±


7-7


2. Receives the message on the main receive.

•

The main transmit is looped back to the main receive.

•

The FSK enters the balanced to unbalanced receiver

U28C and U28D.

•


±

1 dB at J11. The

FSK goes to switch S1, close section 3.

•

The FSK goes through J27 with pins 2/3 jumpered together.

•

The FSK goes to switch S1, close section 2, open sections 1 and 4.

•

The FSK passes through level op amp U34B.

•


±

1 dB at TP8.

•

The FSK is then passed to U16 to be decoded.

•

The serial data is then passed through transmission gate U33C to the DUART U6 to be sent to the microprocessor.

3. Sends a digital message out the secondary transmit.

•

The digital data is sent by the DUART U6 and sent out of the RS-232 driver U35E.

•

Close sections 3 and 4 on S3.

1. Sends an FSK message on both the Main and

Secondary Transmit PCMs in Slot 31.

•

An FSK message is generated and is sent through the leveling op amp U32B.

•

The FSK message is passed through transmission gate U31C.

•

This is then sent out the balanced op amp drivers

U28A and U28B.

•

The transmit is looped to the receive of the same card.

•

The FSK message is received by the balanced line receiver op amp U28C and U28D.

•

The message is routed to J27, pin 2 and pin 3 connected together.

•

The message then passes through transmission gate

U30B to the summing op amp U32C.

•

The message is then sent to the CODEC ID U19.

•

The transmit time slot is determined by U26, U22,

U23, U36A, U36B, U20 and U21.

•

The PCM is then routed to the main PCM via U25 through the selection by microprocessor U7, pin 5 and Pin 48.

•

Once the message is sent via the main PCM it is then routed to the secondary PCM.

4. Receives the message on the secondary receive.

•

The secondary transmit is connected to the secondary receive.

•

Close sections 1 and 2 of S4.

•

The data is received by the RS-232 receiver U35D and is passed to the DUART U6 through the transmission gate U33D.

5. Closes the M-lead and receives the E-lead.

•

The relay K1 is activated to close the M-lead.

•

The M-lead is connected to the E-lead.

•

J36 is jumper to pin 1 and 2 or pin 2 and 3.

•

The E-lead is detected by opto isolator U29.

•

This indication is passed to the microprocessor.

7.5.5 TEST "5"

This test is used with Test "6" to verify the correct operation of the main and secondary PCMs.

Use Test "1" and Test "8" to setup the cards.


•

The PCM is received by U59 and U26.

•

The appropriate PCM is selected by selecting transmission gate U27A for the Main PCM and U27D for the Secondary PCM.

•

The PCM is then passed to the CODEC IC U19.

The receive time slot is determined by U26, U55,

U56, U3A, U3B, and U52.

•

The output of the CODEC IC passes through leveling op amp U32A.

•

The message then passes through transmission gate

U57C to switch S1, section 4.

•

The message then passes through leveling op amp

U34B to the FSK IC U16.

•

The message is converted to digital and is passed through transmission gate U33C to the DUART U6 to be decoded by the microprocessor.

7-8


7.5.6 TEST "6"

This test is used in conjunction with Test "5" to verify the correct operation of the main and secondary

PCMs. Use Test "1" and Test "8" to setup the cards.

This test is the same as Test "5" but transmits in

Slot 0 and receives in Slot 31.

and then sends the System Alignment Tone to the telephone line.

7.6 DS1 DISPLAY DEFINITIONS

The following tables define the tasks performed when displayed on DS1.

7.5.7 TEST "7"

Closes the relays on the telephone line personality card. This connects the telephone line and the

Silent Slot of the VTM Bus to the main transmit audio.

This test is conducted the same as Test "1" except the System Alignment Tone is replaced with the Silent

Slot of the VTM PCM.

7.5.8 TEST "8"

Turns on the FSK and transmits the 1200 Hz tone.

1. The FSK is generated by U16, passes through level op amp U32B.

•


±

0.5 dB at TP4.

2. The FSK then passes through transmission gate

U31C with less than 0.25 dB of loss. The control line (U31C, pin 6) should be high ( > 8V).

3. The signal then passes to the balanced line driver op amps U28A and U28B.

•


±

1 dB at J12.

•


±


7.5.9 TEST "9"

This allows the TIM-DID to answer an incoming call and provide System Alignment Tone to the telephone line. This allows the DID to have the hybrid adjust circuit tuned.

This test is the same as Test "1". The exception here is that the DID waits to answer the incoming call

Table 7-4 DIM CARD DISPLAY/TASKS

B

C

D

E

F

8

9

A

A

6

7

4

5

2

3

0

1

DS1 TASK

Initialization

Await Enable

Idle

Transmit

Receive

All Call

Connect PTT

Trunk Verification

Interrogate

Trunk Conversation

Facility Acquisition

Await Trunk

Trunk Destination Conversation

Ring Channel

Channel Conversation

Console Initialization

Standby

Table 7-5 CCM CARD DISPLAY TASKS

DS1 TASK

8

F

4

5

3

3*

0

1

2

2*

Initialization

Await Enable

Idle

IDB Bus Access Error

Transmit

CSB Bus Access Error

Receive

Duplex

Suspend Audio

Standby

* With Red Alarm LED CR402 on

7-9

Table 7-6 CIM CARD DISPLAY/TASKS

DS1 TASK

B

C

C

D

8

9

A

B

E

E

F

0

1

3

3

1

3

2

2

2

1

2

2

4

5

6

7

7

1

Initialization

Await Enable

Idle

Registration


Transmit

Hold

CSB Bus Access Error

Receive

Duplex Task

3

Duplex Task

4

Hang

Busy Hang

Suspend Audio

Selective Disable

Dynamic Reassignment

Channel Verification

Interrogate

Dial Tone

DTMF Confirmation

Ring

All Call

End Call

Standby

1 With Green LED CR401 on.

2 With Red Alarm LED CR402 on.

3 Rx/Tx with different Home, Group and Site.

4 Rx/Tx with same Home, Group and Site.

Table 7-7 TIM CARD DISPLAY/TASKS

DS1 TASK

9

C

D

E

F

F*

7

8

4

5

2

3

0

1

Initialization

Await Enable

Idle

Incoming Seize

TIM Incoming

Incoming Channel Unique ID

DIM Incoming Conversation

TIM Outgoing


End Call

SNM Incoming Conversation

Incoming Channel Group ID

Standby

No Trunk

* With Green LED CR401 on.


Table 7-8 SNM CARD DISPLAY/TASKS

DS1 TASK

D

E

F

7

8

8**

9

9**

A

B

C

5

6

3

4

0

1

2

2*

Initialization

Await Enable

Idle


Incoming Seize

SNM Incoming

Incoming Channel

Acquire DIM Incoming

DIM Incoming Conversation

SNM Outgoing

Queue Call

Outgoing Channel

Queue Seize

Queue Wait

Link Test

End Call

Link Wait

TIM Outgoing Conversation

Standby


** With Red Alarm LED CR402 on.

DS1

8

F

4

5

2

3

0

1

Table 7-9 DCM CARD DISPLAY/TASKS

TASK

Initialization

Await Enable

Idle

Transmit

Receive

Duplex

Suspend Audio

Standby

7-10

Table 7-10 IDM CARD DISPLAY/TASKS

DS1 TASK

B

C

C

D

9

A

B

B

7

8

4

6

2

3

0

1

E

F

F*

Initialization

Await Enable

Idle

Transmit

Receive

Connect PTT

Trunk Verification

Interrogate

Trunk Conversation

Facility Acquisition

Telephone Acquisition

Await Trunk

DIM Outgoing Conversation

Ring Channel

Channel Verification


All Call

Standby

No Trunk


Table 7-11 LEM CARD DISPLAY/TASKS

DS1 TASK

0

1

2

2*

Initialization

Await Enable

Idle


* With Red Alarm LED CR4021 on.


Table 7-13 VDM CARD DISPLAY/TASKS

DS1 TASK

3

F

0

1

2

2*

Initialization

Await Enable

Idle


Transmit

Standby


Table 7-14 WAM CARD DISPLAY/TASKS

DS1 TASK

0

1

2

3

4

5

Not Initialized

Initialized but Waiting for WAC Configuration

WAC Configured but Idle

Receive Only

Receive of Other Transmit

Transmit Only

2

1

6

7

8

Not Used

Acquiring a Channel

3

Full Duplex Mode

4

1

Console Originated Calls.

2

E-Lead Activated Call; an Outbound WAM.

3

Happens very fast, should rarely see a 7.

4

Tx and Rx; the Originating WAM.

Table 7-12 GPM CARD DISPLAY/TASKS

DS1 TASK

3

F

0

1

2

2*

Initialization

Await Enable

Idle


Transmit

Standby


7-11


4

3

2

1

ON

Figure 7-2 BASIC BOARD MODULE ALIGNMENT POINTS DIAGRAM

7-12


INJECTOR/

EXTRACTOR

(GRN) CR401

(YEL) CR403

(RED) ALARM CR402

(GRN) POWER CR404

DS1

J13 GROUND

J12 OUTPUT TEST POINT

J11 INPUT TEST POINT

R41 MAIN INPUT

R42 MAIN OUTPUT

MON/LINE

EQU

J1 RX

MON/LINE

EQU

J2 TX

INJECTOR/

EXTRACTOR

Figure 7-3 BASIC BOARD MODULE CARD EDGE LAYOUT

7-13



7-14

CHANNEL INTERFACE MODULE (CIM)

SECTION 8 CHANNEL INTERFACE MODULE (CIM)

8.1 DESCRIPTION

Refer to 3000 Series Switch Service Information manual, Part No. 001-3139-102, for the component

layout, parts list and schematic. Refer to Figure 7-1

for the Basic Board block diagram. The Channel Interface Module (CIM) connects the Switch to the Multi-

Net and LTR Repeaters. Each repeater has a CIM that monitors and controls the repeater through logic signaling.

8.1.1 REPEATER SIGNALING

The CIM uses one of three methods to exchange control information with its repeater: RS-232 lines,

Audio Frequency Shift Keying (AFSK) data on a separate audio path, or by AFSK data in a blank and burst mode on the voice audio path.

8.1.2 REPEATER CONTROL

The CIM controls the repeater with restart, enable and disable, executes requests to read and write to the repeater's memory, and tells the repeater transmit code, hang or send turnoff. The CIM receives confirmation of all requests made to the repeater and sends information the repeater receives.

8.1.3 VOICE CONNECTION

The CIM provides a 4-Wire 600 ohm balanced voice connection to the repeater, converts audio to and from Pulse Code Modulation (PCM), transmits and receives on the PCM buses, and controls voice audio gating to and from the repeater.


The CIM uses the Intra-Terminal Data Bus (IDB) to communicate to other modules and send messages to and receive messages from the Call Processor that controls its actions.

The status of the CIM/Repeater combination is determined by the other modules by what the CIM transmits on the Channel Status Bus (CSB). The other modules monitor the CSB and determine if a CIM has the appropriate group and status for the type of communication the module requires.

8.2 CIM SETUP PROCEDURE


Refer to Figure 8-1 for Alignment Points

Diagram.

Command and Control Communication

The command and control communication to the

Multi-Net Logic Module or the Repeater Interface

Module may take place by several different forms.

The form chosen is typically dependent upon the location of the repeaters to the CIM equipment.

1. If the location is within 200 feet, it is suggested that the communication take place digitally on the secondary line.

2. If the location is greater than 200 feet, the communication taking place uses the Audio Frequency

Shift Keyed (AFSK) modems. This may take place on the Secondary lines if the appropriate facilities are available; i.e. 4-Wire leased line or microwave link.

3. The AFSK may be done using the blank and burst mode on the Main audio lines. This is typically used when the link is by leased lines or microwave, but the number of lines available does not allow for the use of the secondary line connections. (This has a low level burst of data (100 ms) at the end of transmissions.)

8-1


Table 8-1 CIM SWITCH SETTINGS

Switch Open Sections Close Sections

Digital Communication Using Secondary Lines

S1

S3

S4

S5

-

-

1

1

-

-

2

2

3

-

-

-

4

-

4

-

1

1

-

-

2

2

-

-

-

3

3

3

AFSK Communication Using Secondary Lines

-

4

-

4

S1

S3

S4

S5

S1

S3

S4

S5

1

-

-

-

2

-

2

-

-

-

-

3

-

-

4

4

-

1

1

1

-

2

-

2

3

3

3

-

AFSK Communication On The Main Line

4

4

-

-

1

-

1

1

2

-

-

2

3

-

-

3

4

-

4

4

-

1

-

-

-

2

2

-

-

3

3

-

-

4

-

-

8.2.3 CIM BACKPLANE EXTERNAL CONTACTS

See the Backplane Section 23 for pin-outs on the

shelf backplane and wire harness pinouts.

Table 8-3 BACKPLANE PINOUTS

Backplane

P34 to P45 pin 27 pin 28 pin 29 pin 30 pin 31 pin 32

Description

Sec Rx +

Sec Rx -

EA lead

EB lead

Pri Rx Audio+

Pri Rx Audiopin 59 pin 60 pin 61 pin 62 pin 63 pin 64

Sec Tx +

Sec Tx -

MA lead

MB lead

Pri Tx Audio+

Pri Tx Audio-

Wire Harness

J1,3,5,7 pin 1 pin 2 pin 3 pin 4 pin 5 pin 6

J2,4,6,8

RxS+

RxS-

EA

EB

RxA+

RxA-

TxS+

TxS-

MA

MB

TxA+

TxApin 1 pin 2 pin 3 pin 4 pin 5 pin 6


Table 8-2 CIM BOARD JUMPER

PLACEMENT

JU Pin Description

J24 1 to 2*

2 to 3

J27 1 to 2

2 to 3*

P33 1 to 2*

3 to 4*

5

6

J36 1 only*

1 to 2

2 to 3

Selects 27512 EPROM operation


Not Used

Normal Operation



Not used



J14

J15

J21

J22


*Setting for Normal operation.

8-2


4

3

2

1

ON

Figure 8-1 ALIGNMENT POINTS DIAGRAM

8-3


8.2.4 EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS

When connecting the CIM to a RIM or Multi-Net

Logic Drawer, cross connect the Tx lines with the Rx lines. Connect the Secondary Tx and Rx lines with the

Drawers Tx and Rx Data lines.

1. Direct Connection

2. Leased Lines

3. Microwave Link

4. T1 Channel Bank Interfaces

This ancillary equipment requires certain input and output levels for proper operation. The module should be adjusted accordingly.

Table 8-4 CIM EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS

Label

RIM to CIM CONNECTIONS

TB701 TB702

CIM/

P1

Label

GND

STA1

STA2

SRA1

SRA2

SRD1

SRD2

STD1

STD2

RxDA+

RxDA-

TxDA+

TxDA-

RxA+

RxA-

TxA+

TxApin 1 pin 2 pin 3 pin 4 pin 1 pin 2 pin 3 pin 4

-pin 59

-pin 60

-pin 27

-pin 28

-pin 63

-pin 64

-pin 31

-pin 32

Label

MLM to CIM CONNECTIONS

TB 1

CIM/

P1

Label

TxS+

TxS-

RxS+

RxS-

RxA+

TxA-

RxA+

RxA-

7

8

5

6

9

3

4

1

2

NC

-pin 31

-pin 32

-pin 63

-pin 64

-pin 59

-pin 60

-pin 27

-pin 28

RxA+

RxA-

TxA+

TxA-

TxS+

TxS-

RxS+

RxS-

8.3 CIM ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS

8.3.1 PRE-ALIGNMENT

The CIM is pre-aligned with the Basic Board

Module alignment procedures, Refer to Section 7.3.

8.3.2 CIM ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE

Connections to the CIM may take several forms as follows:

Main Transmit

1. Determine the maximum level to be received by the ancillary equipment to be transmitted.

2. Select Test 1 (S5, open section 1, close sections 2, 3 and 4).

3. Reset the module, Press S2 and release.

4. Adjust R44 for -12 dB from the maximum level in

Step 1 at J12.

5. Select for normal operation (S5 all sections closed).


Example: Microwave has -16 dBm max input, Set

J12 for -28 dBm.

Main Receive

1. Determine the maximum transmit level that is sent by the ancillary equipment to the interface module.



4. Insert an alignment tone -12 dB from the level determined in Step 1 using a 600-ohm audio oscillator into EQU port of J1. Otherwise, set the ancillary equipment to send the alignment tone to the interface module.

8-4


Figure 8-2 CIM INPUT AND OUTPUT LEVELS

5. Adjust R41 to be -6 dBm at J11, +6 dBm if maximum level is sent by the ancillary equipment.



Example: Microwave has +7 dBm max output.

Apply -5 dBm and set J11 for -6 dBm or apply +7 dBm, then set for +6 dBm.

Secondary Receive




Secondary Transmit


2. Select Test 8 (S5, open section 4, close 1, 2 and 3).


4. Adjust R90 for -12 dB from maximum level in Step

1 at TP9.



Example: Microwave has -16 dBm maximum input, set TP9 for -28 dBm.

4. Insert an alignment tone -12 dB from the level determined in Step 1 using a 600 ohm audio oscillator into RXS ± , breaking the connection to the ancillary equipment. Otherwise, set the ancillary equipment to send the alignment tone to the interface module.

5. Adjust R102 to be -12 dBm at TP8, 0 dBm if maximum level is sent by the ancillary equipment.




Apply -5 dBm and set TP8 for -12 dBm or if

+7 dBm then set TP8 for 0 dBm.

8-5


8.4 CIM AUDIO SUMMATION PERSONALITY

CARD

The CIM Audio Summation Personality Card sums the CIM card transmit and receive audio output from the external connections. This summation provides voice recording of a channel's audio. The audio is summed to require only one voice track of a

logging recorder (see Figure 8-3).

8.4.1 INTERNAL CONNECTIONS

1. Remove the jumpers on P33.

2. Plug the personality card into P33.

3. Connect the wire harness to the M-lead relay, K1, pins 1 and 4.

4. Remove Q12 to ensure the M-lead is inactive.

5. Plug the wire harness into the audio summation board.


The summed audio is outputted on the MA and

MB external connections. The appropriate track of the logging recorder is then connected to the MA and

MB lines.

8.4.3 ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE

Main Transmit





Step 1 at J12. Adjust R1 for -12 dBm at EP2.




J12 for -28 dBm.

Main Receive




4. Insert an alignment tone -12 dB from the level determined in Step 1 using a 600 ohm audio oscillator into EQU port of J1. Otherwise, set the ancillary equipment to send the alignment tone to the interface module.


Adjust R2 for -12 dBm at EP1 if average level, or

0 dBm if maximum level.




Apply -5 dBm and set J11 for -6 dBm or apply

+7 dBm, then set for +6 dBm.

8-6


Figure 8-3 SUMMATION BOARD ALIGNMENT POINTS DIAGRAM

8-7



8-8

CONVENTIONAL CHANNEL MODULE (CCM)

SECTION 9 CONVENTIONAL CHANNEL MODULE (CCM)

9.1 DESCRIPTION



for the Basic Board block diagram. The Conventional

Channel Module (CCM) connects the Switch to a

Conventional Repeater. Each repeater has a CCM that controls the repeater through logic signaling.


The CCM exchanges control information with the CRM via Audio Frequency Shift Keying (AFSK) data in a blank and burst mode on the voice audio path.


The CCM monitors and controls the repeater transmit, receives confirmation of all requests made to the repeater and sends information the repeater received.


The CCM provides a 4-Wire 600 ohm balanced voice connection to the repeater, converts audio to and from Pulse Code Modulation (PCM), transmits and receives on the PCM buses, and controls voice audio gating to and from the repeater.


The CCM uses the Intra-Terminal Data Bus

(IDB) to communicate to other modules and send messages to and receive messages from the Call

Processor that controls its actions.

The status of the CCM/CRM/Repeater combination is determined by the other modules by what the

CCM transmits on the Channel Status Bus (CSB).

The other modules monitor the CSB and determine if a CCM has the appropriate group and status for the type of communication the module requires.

9.2 CCM SETUP PROCEDURE

9.2.1 CCM SWITCH SETTINGS


Diagram.



Conventional Repeater Module (CRM) is by blank and burst mode of Audio Frequency Shift Keyed data on the Main audio lines.

9.2.2 AFSK COMMUNICATION ON THE MAIN

LINES

Refer to Table 9-1 for switch settings.

Table 9-1 CCM SWITCH SETTINGS

Switch Open Sections

S1

S3

S4

S5

1

-

1

1

2

-

-

2

3

-

-

3

4

-

4

4

-

1

-

-

Close Sections

-

2

2

-

-

3

3

-

-

4

-

-

9.2.3 CCM JUMPER PLACEMENT

Table 9-2 CCM JUMPER PLACEMENT


J24 1 to 2*

2 to 3

J27 1 to 2

2 to 3*

P33 1 to 2

3 to 4

5 and 6

J36 1 only

1 to 2

2 to 3



Not used

Normal operation open open open

Not used



J14

J15

J21

J22


* Indicates normal operation.

9-9


9.2.4 CCM BACKPLANE EXTERNAL

CONTACTS

See Backplane Section 23 for pinouts on the shelf

backplane and wire harness pinouts.

Table 9-3 CCM EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS

Backplane

P34 to P45 pin 27 pin 28 pin 29 pin 30 pin 31 pin 32 pin 59 pin 60 pin 61 pin 62 pin 63 pin 64

Description

Wire Harness

J1,3,5,7

Sec Rx +

Sec Rx -

EA lead

EB lead

Pri Rx Audio+


J2,4,6,8

RxS+

RxS-

EA

EB

RxA+

RxA-

Sec Tx +

Sec Tx -

MA lead

MB lead

Pri Tx Audio+

Pri Tx Audio-

TxS+

TxS-

MA

MB

TxA+


9.3 CCM ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS

9.3.1 PRE-ALIGNMENT

The CCM is pre-aligned with the Basic Board

Module alignment procedures, Refer to Section 7.3.

9.3.2 CCM ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE

Connections to the CCM may take several forms:


2. Leased Lines

3. Microwave Link



Main Transmit





Step 1 at J12.




J12 for -28 dBm.

Main Receive




4. Insert the maximum level determined in Step 1 using a 600 ohm audio oscillator into EQU port of

J1. Otherwise, set the ancillary equipment to send the maximum level alignment tone to the interface module.

5. Adjust R41 to be -6 dBm at J11.

6. Adjust R102 to be 0 dBm at TP8.



Example: Microwave has +7 dBm maximum output, set J11 for -5 dBm.

9-10

4

3

2

1

ON



9-11



9-12

DISPATCH CHANNEL MODULE (DCM)

SECTION 10 DISPATCH CHANNEL MODULE (DCM)

10.1 DESCRIPTION


layout, parts list and schematic. Refer to Figure 7-1 for

the Basic Board block diagram. The Dispatch Channel

Module (DCM) connects the Switch to a Conventional

Repeater. Each repeater has a DCM that controls the repeater through logic signaling.


The DCM exchanges control information with the

CRM via Audio Frequency Shift Keying (AFSK) data in a blank and burst mode on the voice audio path.


The DCM monitors and controls the repeater transmit, receives confirmation of all requests made to the repeater and sends information the repeater received.

10.2 DCM SETUP PROCEDURE

10.2.1 DCM SWITCH SETTINGS

Refer to Figure 10-1 for the Alignment Points

Diagram.



Conventional Repeater Module (CRM) is by blank and burst mode of Audio Frequency Shift Keyed data on the Main audio lines.


LINES

Refer to Table 10-1 for switch settings.

Table 10-1 DCM SWITCH SETTINGS


S1

S3

S4

S5

1

-

1

1

2

-

-

2

3

-

-

3

4

-

4

4

-

1

-

-

Close Sections

-

2

2

-

-

3

3

-

-

4

-

-


The DCM provides a 4-Wire 600 ohm balanced voice connection to the repeater, converts audio to and from Pulse Code Modulation (PCM), transmits and receives on the PCM buses, and controls voice audio gating to and from the repeater.


The DCM uses the Intra-Terminal Data Bus

(IDB) to communicate to other modules and send messages to and receive messages from the Call

Processor that controls its actions.

The DCM monitors the CSB to determine if a

CIM is active with the appropriate group.

10.2.3 DCM JUMPER PLACEMENT

Table 10-2 DCM JUMPER PLACEMENT


J24 1 to 2*

2 to 3

J27 1 to 2

2 to 3*

P33 1 to 2

3 to 4

5 and 6

J36 1 only

1 to 2

2 to 3



Not used


Not used



J14

J15

J21

J22



10-1


10.2.4 DCM BACKPLANE EXTERNAL

CONTACTS

See the Backplane Section 23 for pinouts on the


Table 10-3 DCM EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS

Backplane


Description

Wire Harness

J1,3,5,7

Sec Rx +

Sec Rx -

EA lead

EB lead

Pri Rx Audio+


J2,4,6,8

RxS+

RxS-

EA

EB

RxA+

RxA-

Sec Tx +

Sec Tx -

MA lead

MB lead

Pri Tx Audio+

Pri Tx Audio-

TxS+

TxS-

MA

MB

TxA+


Main Transmit


2. Select Test 1 (S5, open section 1, close sections 2, 3 and 4)



Step 1 at J12.



Example: Microwave has -16 dBm max input, set

J12 for -28 dBm.

10.3 DCM ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS

10.3.1 PRE-ALIGNMENT

The DCM is pre-aligned with the Basic Board

Module alignment procedures (refer to Section 7.3).

10.3.2 DCM ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE

Connections to the DCM may take several forms:


2. Leased Lines

3. Microwave Link



Main Receive

Determine the maximum transmit level that is sent by the ancillary equipment to the interface module.




J1. Otherwise, set the ancillary equipment to send the maximum level alignment tone to the interface module.






10-2


4

3

2

1

ON


10-3



10-4

DISPATCH INTERFACE MODULE (DIM)

SECTION 11 DISPATCH INTERFACE MODULE (DIM)




the Basic Board block diagram. The Dispatch Interface Module (DIM) uses one of two methods of interface to the dispatch equipment:


2. Tone Remote

A DIM with direct connection is associated with only one group code and uses a form of Type II E&M lead input similar to the mobile PTT.

A DIM with tone remote connection decodes guard tone for the PTT indication and decodes DTMF to select from one of ten group codes. A control sequence uses the DTMF to place the DIM in scan mode or to stop and use a specific group code. The tone remote feature requires the use of a plug-in personality card.

The DIM connects the 4-Wire 600 ohm balanced audio with the Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) data paths and communicates to other modules via the

Intra-Terminal Data Bus (IDB). The DIM also monitors the Channel Interface Module (CIM) Channel

Status Bus (CSB) to determine if a CIM is active with a DIM group.

11.2 DIM SETUP PROCEDURE



Diagram.



Consoles may take the place by two different forms.

The form chosen is typically dependent upon the type of console connected to the DIM.

1. If the Console is a normal contact closure PTT, the connection is by direct connect. This uses the E&M lead input and output.

2. A Tone Remote Console uses 4-Wire audio for the connection. The DIM requires the use of a tone remote personality card.

Table 11-1 DIM SWITCH SETTINGS


S1

S3

S4

S5

S1

S3

S4

S5

1

-

1

1

1

-

1

1

Close Sections

Direct Connection

2

-

2

2

2

-

2

2

3

-

-

3

4

-

4

4

Tone Remote

-

1

-

-

3

-

3

3

4

-

4

4

-

1

-

-

-

2

-

-

-

2

-

-

-

3

-

-

-

3

3

-

-

4

-

-

-

4

-

-

11.2.2 DIM JUMPER PLACEMENT

Table 11-2 DIM BOARD JUMPER

PLACEMENT


J24 1 to 2*

2 to 3

J27 1 to 2

2 to 3*

P33 1 to 2*

3 to 4*

5

6

J36 1 only*

1 to 2

2 to 3



Not Used

Normal Operation



Not used



J14

J15

J21

J22



11-1


Table 11-3 BACKPLANE PLACEMENT

Backplane


Description

Wire Harness

J1,3,5,7

Sec Rx +

Sec Rx -

EA lead

EB lead

Pri Rx Audio+


J2,4,6,8

RxS+

RxS-

EA

EB

RxA+

RxA-

Sec Tx +

Sec Tx -

MA lead

MB lead

Pri Tx Audio+

Pri Tx Audio-

TxS+

TxS-

MA

MB

TxA+


11.2.3 E-LEAD SELECTION

If the PTT from the console is an open contact relay, either of the above options for J36 may be used.

If the PTT is a closure to ground with a pull-up resistor to a positive voltage, J36, pin 2 should be connected to ground without connection to pin 1 or pin 3.

11.2.4 DIM BACKPLANE EXTERNAL

CONTACTS

See Backplane Section 23 for pinouts on the shelf

backplane and wire harness pinouts.

11.3 DIM ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATION


The DIM is pre-aligned with the Basic Board

Module alignment procedures (Refer to Section 7.3).

The tone remote personality card should be removed and P33 jumpered accordingly for the proper pre-

alignment of the module (Refer to Table 11-2).

11.3.2 PRE-ALIGNMENT WITH TONE REMOTE

PERSONALITY CARD

Set the module for pre-alignment by referring to

Table 11-1, Alignment Points Diagram Figure 7-2, and

Figure 11-1.

1. Set the card Tone Remote PTT level alignment: a. Inject 2175 Hz ± 1 Hz at 0 dBm into EQU of Rx input J1.

b. Open S1 (Sections 1, 2, 3 and 4).

c. Set S5 for Test 1 (Open section 1, close section 2,

3 and 4).

d. Reset the module, press S2 and release.

5. Main Rx audio level from J1: a. Setup for alignment as in Step 1.

b. Adjust R41 to -6 dBm ± 0.5 dB at J11.

3. Tone Remote Personality Card: a. Adjust R207 for a minimum at EP221. (Should be < -15 dBm.) b. Adjust R228 for 0 dBm ± 0.5 dB at EP224.

c. Adjust R236 for a peak level at EP225.

d. Adjust R272 for a peak level at EP227.

e. Verify EP228/EP229 are high (> 4.5V).

f. Reduce the level of the 2175 Hz tone until EP228 goes low (< 0.8V). Verify the level of the 2175 Hz tone is -10 dBm ± 2 dB.

g. Verify that EP229 is still high ( > 4.5V).

h. Reduce the level of the 2175 Hz tone until EP229 goes low (< 0.8V). Verify the level of the 2175 Hz tone is -40 dBm ± 2 dB.

i. Change the frequency and level of the input tone to 1004 Hz at -12 dBm.

j. Verify that the level at J11 is -6 dBm ± 1 dB.

k. Verify that the level at EP221 is -6 dBm ± 1 dB.

l. Verify that the level at TP5 is -6 dBm ± 1 dB.

m.Adjust R211 for -12 dBm ± 1 dB at EP222.

11-2


14.Main Tx Audio Output Level From J1.


b. Adjust R83 for a -3 dBm ± 0.5 dB level at TP3.

c. Adjust R44 for a -12 dBm ± 0.5 dB level at J12.

4. Tone Remote PTT Tone Output Level.

a. Set S5 for Test 2 (open section 2, close 1, 3 and

4).


c. Adjust R267 for +8 dBm ± 0.5 dB at EP226.

d. Verify the level at J12 to be -1 dBm ± 1 dB.

5. DTMF Encoder Level of the Tone Remote Card.

a. Set S5 for Test 3 (open sections 1 and 2, close 3 and 4).


c. Adjust R216 for -3 dBm ± 0.5 dB at EP223.

d. Verify the level at J12 to be -12 dBm ± 1 dB.

5. Normal Operation a. Set S5 to 0, normal operation (sections 1, 2, 3 and

4 closed).



NOTE: FSK is not aligned since it is not used on the

DIM.

11.4 ALIGNMENT

Connections to the DIM may take several forms:

1. Direct Connection.

2. Leased Lines.

3. Microwave Link.

4. T1 Channel Bank Interfaces.


Main Transmit


2. Set S5 to Test 1 (open section 1, close sections 2, 3 and 4)



Step 1 at J12.

5. Set S5 for normal operation (all sections closed).



J12 for -28 dBm.

Main Receive


2. Set S5 to Test 1 (open section 1, close sections 2, 3 and 4).



J1. Otherwise, set the ancillary equipment to send the alignment tone to the interface module.



7. Reset the module, press S2 and release.


11-3


Secondary Transmit and Receive

Not aligned since the DIM does not use FSK signaling.

11.5 TONE REMOTE DTMF OPERATION

The following formats are the valid sequences of

DTMF control. "N" is the digits 0 through 9.

Press the starting digit.

The tone remote console automatically keys, hold this first digit for 1 second to ensure the tone remote keys and passes the digit.

Press the additional digits.

A confirmation tone is heard if the digit sequence was accepted.

Table 11-4 TONE REMOTE FORMATS

Function

Start Scan

Stop Scan (Group Select)

Enable List N

Disable List N

Enable All

Digits

**

#N

*N*

*N#

*#

11-4


4

3

2

1

ON


11-5


FROM MAIN

BOARD

TO MAIN BOARD

TO MAIN BOARD

TRANSMIT DTMF

2175 Hz

BANDPASS FILTER

U216

U203

U217C

HIGH LEVEL DETECTOR

U210A/B

U211A

LOW LEVEL DETECTOR

U210C/D

U211B

U206

2175 Hz

NOTCH FILTER

U201B/D

U202

U201A/C U218

DTMF ENCODER

U201A/C

U205

U209

TONE GENERATOR

U212

U204A/B

U214A/B

Q204/Q205

TONE LEVEL CONTROL

U208

Figure 11-2 PTT TONE REMOTE CARD BLOCK DIAGRAM

DATA

BUS

11-6


1 2 3 J33

64/128

256

128/256 R93

R75

Figure 11-3 PTT TONE REMOTE CARD ALIGNMENT POINTS DIAGRAM

11-7



11-8

INTELLIGENT DISPATCH MODULE (IDM)

SECTION 12 INTELLIGENT DISPATCH MODULE (IDM)


Refer to 3000 Series Switch Service Information

Manual, Part No. 001-3139-102, for the component


the Basic Board block diagram. The Intelligent

Dispatch Module (IDM) interfaces to a Multi-Net II dispatch console.

The IDM has a digital data connection that requires a separate full duplex 9600 baud RS-232 interface called the Intelligent Dispatch Interface Bus

(IDIB). The separate data path is required to allow the computer controlled dispatch console(s) to monitor and display the status of other groups. This status and display update can take place while the console is busy with voice communication on another group. The information exchanged between the IDM and the console(s) controls what the IDM receives and transmits for voice communication.

The IDM connects the 4-wire, 600-ohm balanced audio with the Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) data paths and communicates to other modules via the

Intra-Terminal Data Bus (IDB). The IDM also monitors the Channel Status Bus (CSB) to send update changes to the IDM via the IDIB.

CALL

PROCESSOR

NETWORK

INTRA-TERMINAL

DATA BUS

(NetIDB)

NETWORK

CHANNEL

STATUS BUS

(NetCSB)

NetNIM

NETWORK

INTERFACE

MODULE

ETHERNET

BUS



(CIB)


(CIB)

LOGGING RECORDER

CHANNEL

INTERFACE

MODULE

CIMs

CONVENTIONAL

CHANNEL

MODULE

CCMs

WIDE

AREA

MODULE

WAMs

LOGGING

ENCODER

MODULE

LEMs

PSTN OR PABX

TELEPHONE

INTERFACE

MODULE

TIMs

SYSTEM

NETWORK

MODULE

SNMs

DISPATCH

CHANNEL

MODULE

DCMs

IDMs


INTELLIGENT DISPATCH INTERFACE BUS (IDIB)

Figure 12-1 IDM DATA BUS


12-1


12.2 IDM SETUP PROCEDURE



Diagram.



Consoles takes place on a digital RS-232 link at 9600 baud. The digital link occurs on the Secondary lines.

12.2.3 IDM BACKPLANE EXTERNAL

CONTACTS



Table 12-1 IDM SWITCH SETTINGS


S1

S3

S4

S5

-

-

1

1

-

-

2

2

3

-

-

-

4

-

4

-

1

1

-

-

Close Sections

2

2

-

-

-

3

3

3

-

4

-

4

12.2.2 IDM JUMPER PLACEMENT

Table 12-2 IDM BOARD JUMPER

PLACEMENT


J24 1 to 2*

2 to 3

J27 1 to 2

2 to 3*

P33 1 to 2*

3 to 4*

5

6

J36 1 only*

1 to 2

2 to 3



Not Used

Normal Operation



Not used



J14

J15

J21

J22




Backplane

P34 to P45 Description pin 27 pin 28 pin 29 pin 30 pin 31 pin 32

Sec Rx +

Sec Rx -

EA lead

EB lead

Pri Rx Audio+


Sec Tx +

Sec Tx -

MA lead

MB lead

Pri Tx Audio+

Pri Tx Audio-

Wire Harness


Signal

Ground

J2,4,6,8

Signal

Ground pin 1 pin 2 pin 3 pin 4 pin 5 pin 6

12-2


4

3

2

1

ON


12-3


12.3 IDM ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATION


The IDM is pre-aligned with the Basic Board

Module alignment procedures, refer to Section 7.3.

1. Main Rx Audio Level From J1: a. Setup for alignment, input 1004 Hz tone at

-12 dBm into J1 EQU.

b. Set S5 for Test 1 (open section 1; close 2, 3 and 4).

c. Reset the module, press S2 and release.

d. Adjust R41 to -6 dBm

±

0.5 dB at J11.

e. Verify that the level at TP5 is -6 dBm

±

1 dB.

6. Main Tx Audio Output Level From J1: a. Setup for alignment as in Step 1.

b. Adjust R83 for a -3 dBm

±

0.5 dB level at TP3.

c. Adjust R44 for a -12 dBm

±

0.5 dB level at J12.

4. Normal Operation: a. Set S5 to 0, normal operation (Close sections 1, 2,

3 and 4).



NOTE: FSK is not aligned since it is not used on the IDM.

12.4 ALIGNMENT

Connections to the IDM may take several forms:

•

Direct Connection

•

Leased Lines

•

Microwave Link

•

T1 Channel Bank Interfaces


Main Transmit




4. Adjust R44 for -12 dB from the maximum level in step 1 at J12.



Example: Microwave has -16 dBm maximum input, set J12 for -28 dBm.

Main Receive


2. Set S5 to Test 1 (open section 1, close sections 2, 3 and 4)








12-4



Not aligned since the IDM does not use FSK signaling.

12.5 PCM SUMMATION PERSONALITY CARD

The PCM Summation Personality Card sums multiple time slots on the PCM audio bus for the unselect audio for the Multi-Net Tracer Series of consoles

(see Figure 12-3).


1. Plug the personality card into J32.

2. Plug the personality card into the piggyback bus via

J31.

3. Connect a wire harness to:

Rx PCM Primary U26, pin 13 (Blk)

Master Clock U26, pin 9 (Wht)

Master Sync U26, pin 7 (Red)

4. Connect the summed audio using a wire harness to

M-lead relay K1, pin 1 (Wht) and pin 4 (Red).


6. Plug the wire harness into the audio summation board.


The summed audio output is on the MA and MB external connections. The unselect audio is then connected to the MA and MB leads.


1. Set CIM S5 to Test 9 (open section 1-4, close 2-3).

2. Set IDM S5 to Test 9 (open section 1-4, close 2-3).

3. Adjust R1 for +2.5 dBm at TP1 on the PCM

Summation card.

4. Adjust R25 for -3 dBm at TP2 on the PCM Summation card.

5. Set S5 on CIM and IDM (all closed).

6. Reset each module, Press S2 and release.

12-5


WHT

RED

Figure 12-3 SUMMATION BOARD ALIGNMENT POINTS DIAGRAM

12-6

SYSTEM NETWORK MODULE (SNM)

SECTION 13 SYSTEM NETWORK MODULE (SNM)




for the Basic Board block diagram. The System

Network Module (SNM) is the interface that allows

Unique ID calling from RF units and multiple

Switches to be connected in a total system network.

The SNM uses a 4-wire 600 ohm balanced audio on the interface and connects audio to the PCM data paths. The SNM also uses a Type II E&M lead connection set for connection initiation and supervision.

The SNM communicates with other modules via the Intra-Terminal Data Bus (IDB) and monitors the

Channel Status Bus (CSB) for the group set up to use the SNM.

SNMs pass information on the interface relative to the type of call desired and connection status of the end device, using Audio Frequency Shift Keying

(AFSK) data in a blank and burst mode. This form of data passing allows a standard 4-Wire interface connection and does not require a specialized system switching node.

CALL

PROCESSOR

NETWORK

INTRA-TERMINAL

DATA BUS

(NetIDB)

NETWORK

CHANNEL

STATUS BUS

(NetCSB)

NetNIM

NETWORK

INTERFACE

MODULE

ETHERNET

BUS



(CIB)


(CIB)

LOGGING RECORDER

CHANNEL

INTERFACE

MODULE

CIMs

CONVENTIONAL

CHANNEL

MODULE

CCMs

WIDE

AREA

MODULE

WAMs

LOGGING

ENCODER

MODULE

LEMs

PSTN OR PABX

TELEPHONE

INTERFACE

MODULE

TIMs

SYSTEM

NETWORK

MODULE

SNMs

DISPATCH

CHANNEL

MODULE

DCMs




13-1


13.2 SNM SETUP PROCEDURE

13.2.1 SNM SWITCH SETTINGS

See Figure 13-2 for Alignment Points Diagram.


The command and control communication is by blank and burst signaling using Audio Frequency Shift

Keyed data on the Main audio lines.


LINES

Table 13-1 SNM SWITCH SETTINGS

Switch

S1

S3

S4

S5

Open Sections Close Sections

AFSK Communication On The Main Line.

1

-

1

1

2

-

-

2

3

-

-

3

4

-

4

4

-

1

-

-

-

2

2

-

-

3

3

-

-

4

-

-

13.2.4 SNM BACKPLANE EXTERNAL CON-

TACTS



Table 13-3 SNM EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS

Backplane


Description

Sec Rx +

Sec Rx -

EA lead

EB lead

Pri Rx Audio+


Sec Tx +

Sec Tx -

MA lead

MB lead

Pri Tx Audio+

Pri Tx Audiopin 1 pin 2 pin 3 pin 4 pin 5 pin 6

Wire Harness

J1,3,5,7

RxS+

RxS-

EA

EB

RxA+

RxA-

J2,4,6,8

TxS+

TxS-

MA

MB

TxA+


13.2.3 SNM JUMPER PLACEMENT

Table 13-2 SNM JUMPER PLACEMENT


J24 1 to 2*

2 to 3

J27 1 to 2

2 to 3*

P33 1 to 2

3 to 4

5 and 6

J36 1 only

1 to 2

2 to 3



Not used

Normal operation

Jumpered

Jumpered open

Not used



J14

J15

J21

J22



13.3 SNM ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS


The SNM is pre-aligned with the Basic Board

Module alignment procedures; refer to Section 7.3.

13.3.2 SNM ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE

Connections to the SNM may take several forms:


2. Leased Lines

3. Microwave Link



13-2


4

3

2

1

ON


13-3


Main Transmit


2. Set S5 for Test 1 (open section 1, close sections 2, 3 and 4).



Step 1 at J12.

5. Set S5 for Test 8 (open section 4, close 1, 2 and 3).


7. Adjust R86 to be -12 dBm ± 0.5 dB at TP4.

8. Verify the level at J12 to be -21 dB ± 1 dB from the maximum level from Step 1.


10.Reset the module, Press S2 and release.


J12 for -28 dBm.

Main Receive







6. Close section 2 of S1.






Not used since the secondary line is not used.

SNM

EA

EB

MA

MB

RXA+

RXA-

TXA+

TXA-

SNM

EA

EB

MA

MB

RXA+

RXA-

TXA+

TXA-

Figure 13-3 SNM CABLE LAYOUT

NOTE: This cabling is used within a single Switch or between Switches to allow Unique ID calls to occur.

13-4

TELEPHONE INTERFACE MODULE (TIM)

SECTION 14 TELEPHONE INTERFACE MODULE (TIM)


The Telephone Interface Module (TIM) connects the Switch to the telephone lines and handles telephone line protocols. The TIM may be referred to as a

Trunk Interface Module. Refer to page 31 for FCC

regulations.

The TIM logic unit is microprocessor controlled and communicates to the Call Processor via the intraterminal data communication bus. A Switch may have multiple TIMs with varying styles of telephone lines attached. The telephone line audio is processed to interface with the Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) voice path.

The basic TIM operation functions are as follows:

1. Supervision

2. Signaling

3. Call Supervision

4. Intra-Terminal Communication

CALL

PROCESSOR

NETWORK

INTRA-TERMINAL

DATA BUS

(NetIDB)

NETWORK

CHANNEL

STATUS BUS

(NetCSB)

NetNIM

NETWORK

INTERFACE

MODULE

ETHERNET

BUS



(CIB)


(CIB)

LOGGING RECORDER

CHANNEL

INTERFACE

MODULE

CIMs

CONVENTIONAL

CHANNEL

MODULE

CCMs

WIDE

AREA

MODULE

WAMs

LOGGING

ENCODER

MODULE

LEMs

PSTN OR PABX

TELEPHONE

INTERFACE

MODULE

TIMs

SYSTEM

NETWORK

MODULE

SNMs

DISPATCH

CHANNEL

MODULE

DCMs




14-1


14.1.1 SUPERVISION

The TIM can be seized from either landside or internal. Landside seizure occurs by Direct Inward

Dial (DID) or Two-Way Start (2WY). Internal seizure comes from the Intra-Terminal Data Bus (IDB) as a request for outgoing service on the telephone line (see

Figure 14-15).

Once seizure has occurred, connection supervision takes place. Incoming calls are connected by

Immediate Start or Wink Start. Immediate Start requires the ability to accept digits in less than 70 milliseconds before digits are sent. Wink Start sends digits after a short battery reversal and back to normal

Battery before digits are received. Two-Way

Incoming indicates readiness to accept "end-to-end"

DTMF digits by outputting a "proceed" tone.

Outgoing calls have three ways to determine when to send digits:

1. Immediate Start

Waits 70 milliseconds before digits are sent.

2. Dial Tone Delay

Waits until 100 milliseconds of dial tone is received before digits are sent

3. Wink Delay

Waits for battery reversal and back to normal battery before digits are sent.

14.1.2 SIGNALING

Once connection supervision has occurred, the digit signaling is done. There are two ways to send and receive digits:

1. Dial Pulse

Counts the "breaks and makes" of loop current.

2. DTMF

Determines the tone pair of a set of frequencies.

The TIM sends or receives the appropriate signaling depending on the direction of the call. The

TIM is capable of sending and receiving "end-to- end" signaling where the call is completed and normal voice communication takes place, or numeric information can be sent or received via DTMF. Dial pulse information cannot pass through the telephone company's

Central Office (CO) to make it back and forth to the units.

14.1.3 CALL SUPERVISION

Once the signaling of the digits has occurred, call status is determined for answer and disconnect.

Answer supervision is an indication of when the called party answers the telephone. The preferred method is by reverse battery answer, where the CO reverses the battery connection, therefore, current flow reverses when the called party answers. The other method is mobile speech activity that detects the presence of mobile speech for a certain length of time. If the telephone line cannot recognize reverse battery answer, none is sent toward the CO, and no real answer supervision exits. However, the mobile speech activity can be used for answer detection.

Disconnect supervision detects when the called party hangs-up (disconnects) and a message is sent to the TIM to disconnect from the telephone line. The preferred method is from reverse battery answer, where the battery returns to normal when the called party disconnects. The next method is to wait for the mobile disconnect message. If the mobile does not hang up properly, the message is not sent and the call continues. Fail-safe alternatives watch for loss of mobile speech or detect the return of dial tone. This ensures call disconnect allowing another call to be placed. The TIM then informs the Call Processor that it has disconnected from the telephone line.

14.1.4 INTRA-TERMINAL COMMUNICATION

The TIM communicates to the Call Processor through the Intra-Terminal Data Bus (IDB) and sends activity information to the Call Processor. The Call

Processor sends messages to the TIM to request service, informs the TIM to disconnect, and any other necessary control information.

14-2


14.1.5 TELEPHONE LINE STYLES

There are several different styles of telephone lines the TIM controls. The following styles of lines and their basic connection are supported.

1. Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

The DID offers direct inward dialing of the telephone number and supplies the -48V DC battery voltage to the incoming lines. The Central Office

(CO) contacts the DID by closing the loop and sends the number to the DID by dial pulse or DTMF. The

DID can handle 2, 3 or 4 digits being spilled forward by the CO.

2. 4-Wire E&M

4-Wire E&M is primarily used with electronic switches, public leased lines or microwave equipment to provide complete separation of transmit and receive audio lines. The signaling unit provides the

-48V DC battery to the M-Lead, while the trunk unit provides ground to the M-Lead. The signaling is

reversed for the E-Lead (see Section 14.2).

3. Dial Pulse

Dial pulsing is the "break and make" of the loop path current to cause no flow and flow. The number of breaks, when no current flows, is the number of the desired digit, with 10 pulses equaling 0.

4. Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)

DTMF tone signaling is used on almost all push button telephones. DTMF is where the desired digit is composed of a combination of two tones. A tone pair consists of one tone from the low band group

(697, 770, 852 or 941 Hz), and the high band group

(1209, 1336, 1447 or 1633 Hz).

14.1.6 AUDIO PROCESSING

The audio processing converts intra-terminal voice path audio to be placed on the telephone lines.

The telephone line interface contains a hybrid that transmits and receives audio from the telephone line and keeps the transmitted audio out of the received audio to eliminate sidetone and echoing. The hybrid also converts the balanced telephone line to unbalanced connections.

14.1.7 RECEIVE AUDIO

The receive audio is from the telephone line and processed for the intra-terminal Pulse Code Modula-

tion (PCM) channel stream (see Figure 14-14). The

received audio has three paths:

1. Voice Audio

The receive audio from the telephone line comes from the unbalanced receive side of the hybrid. The audio is level adjusted through an amplifier to give a correct line level adjustment and passes through minimal filtering to eliminate the possibility of unwanted frequencies. A transmission gate turns the audio on and off toward the terminal. The gate is followed by a level adjustment amplifier/buffer before the audio enters the intra-terminal voice processing. The intra-terminal voice processing is a

PCM CODEC with a time slot determination circuit.

The CODEC digitizes the analog voice and outputs it onto the PCM transmit channel stream in the appropriate time slot. The master clock and master frame sync are inputs to the TIM. These inputs provide timing for the CODEC and timing determination circuit.

2. Dial Tone Detection

The receive audio from the telephone line is taken from the line level adjust amplifier buffer and passes into a bandpass filter centered on the frequencies used for dial tone. The bandpass filter is adjusted for detection of the dial tone sent by the CO. The output of the bandpass filter passes to a rectification and detection circuit. The output of the detection circuit indicates the presence of dial tone to the logic unit.

3. DTMF Detection

The receive audio from the telephone line is taken from the line level adjust amplifier buffer. The audio passes into the DTMF detection circuitry and outputs the tone pair received and the valid tone pair signal to the logic unit.

14-3


14.1.8 TRANSMIT AUDIO

The transmit audio from the PCM channel stream is processed to analog and sent to the telephone line

(see Figure 14-14). The functional paths of the

transmit audio are:

1. Voice Path

The transmit voice is processed from the PCM channel stream by the same CODEC and time slot determination circuitry as in the receive audio voice path section above. The digitized voice is converted to analog and filtered by the CODEC to a high pass filter to eliminate low frequency audio. The audio is level adjusted by an amplifier buffer and gated into a summing amplifier buffer. The audio gating provides on/off control of the voice audio to the telephone line. The summing buffer has a level adjustment to set the outgoing line level and drives the unbalanced side of the telephone line hybrid.

2. Mobile Speech Detection

The audio for mobile speech detection comes from the CODEC amplifier buffer. The bandpass filter is centered at the audio frequency recognized for voice peaks. The filtered audio is rectified and detected for the presence of voice. The output of the detector is an input to the logic unit.

3. DTMF Generation

The DTMF signaling is generated on the TIM and transmitted toward the telephone line. The logic unit provides the inputs to the DTMF generation circuit. The generator outputs the desired tones and is adjusted to the proper level with respect to the voice path by an amplifier. The tones pass through a logic unit controlled audio transmission gate, summing amplifier buffer, to the telephone line.

14.2 4-WIRE E&M INTERFACE DESCRIPTION

The 4-Wire E&M Interface Card connects the

Switch with a 4-Wire audio circuit that supports Ear and Mouth (E&M) signaling.

14.2.1 AUDIO

The audio circuit consists of a transmit (Tx) pair and a receive (Rx) pair. The Tx pair transmits audio and DTMF digits. The Rx pair receives audio and

DTMF digits. Dial Tone detection is also supported by the Rx pair.

14.2.2 E&M LEADS

The E&M leads can be configured for Type I, II,

III, IV and V signaling by changing S201 on the

personality card (see Figure 14-21).

The E-Lead is a single input that monitors for -

48V, or ground. This lead is used to detect inbound ringing (detected as battery reversals), receive pulse dialed digits (detected as battery reversals), wink start pulse (detected as a single battery reversal), and an answer or hang-up by the connected circuit (detected as a lead reversal). This lead can be set up for -48V or ground idle states by changing S201, section 7 and 8.

The M-Lead is a single output that signals to the connected circuit with -48V, or ground. This lead is used to request service (battery reversal), send a wink start pulse (battery reversal), signal a hang-up or answer to the circuit (battery reversal), transmit pulse dial digits (sent as battery reversals). The state of this lead is configured by S201, section 1 through 6.

NOTE: If this card is connected to a 2-Wire circuit, a

Termset is required. This card supports pulse dialing for both inbound and outbound. Pulse dialing is described as full battery reversal, not click detection from the Central Office (CO). If click detection is required, an external device is needed to support this feature.

The E&M Interface Card installation instructions are not for a specific installation because of the many unique configurations. The field engineer customizes or alters the installation for the appropriate interface requirements.

14-4


+5V

S1, P4

S1, P3

S1, P2

S1, P1

37 5

38 6

39 7

40 8

33 1

34 2

35 3

36 4

41 9

42 10

43 11

S1, P8

S1, P7

S1, P6

S1, P5

SEC TX PCM

SEC RX PCM

+12V

-48V

-12V

SB 3

SG 4

1

2

M-LEAD 5

E-LEAD 6

TX+ 7

TX8

44 12

45 13

MAS SYNC

MAS CLK

TX PCM

RX PCM

CSB DATA

IDB DATA

IDB IDLE

VTM PCM

CSB IDLE

ALM +

46 14

47 15

MAS SYNC

48 16

MAS CLK

49 17

50 18

TX PCM

RX PCM

51 19

CSB DATA

52 20

53 21

IDB DATA

IDB IDLE

54 22

VTM PCM

55 23

56 24

57 25

CSB IDLE

ALM -

TXS+

TXS-

MA

MB

TXA+

TXA-

58 26

RXS+

59 27

60 28

RXS-

EA

61 29

62 30

63 31

EB

RXA+

RXA-

64 32

-12V

+5V

+12V

-48V

6

5

4

8

7

3

2 RX+

1 RX-

Figure 14-2 E&M INTERFACE CONNECTIONS .

14.2.3 8-POSITION DIP SWITCH S201

The 8-position DIP switch S201 determines the interface type. There are five types of E&M interface signaling, Type I through Type V.

C A U T I O N

Do not adjust S201 with the E&M card connected in any way to the Switch. Damage to the E&M card could result.

Refer to Table 14-1 for S201 configurations for

each type of signaling.

NOTE: S201 positions 7 and 8 are for E-Lead detection type.

Table 14-1 E&M CARD S201 DIP SWITCH

Type

1 2

SETTINGS

3

Position

4 5 6 7 8

I On Off On On On Off Off On

II Off On Off On Off Off Off On

III Off On On On On Off Off On

IV Off On Off On Off Off Off On

V Off Off On Off Off On Off On

Figure 14-3 S201

NOTE: Black is switch position

14-5


Table 14-2 E&M LEAD STATES

M-Lead States for Type I through V

Type

I

Idle

Ground

Active

-48V

Open -48V II

III Ground -48V

IV

V

Open

Open

-48V

Ground

E-Lead State for all Types

7 (Off), 8 (On)

7 (On), 8 (Off)

Open

Ground

Ground

Open

TRUNK

CIRCUIT

E-LEAD

M-LEAD

SB

SG

RNT

TX AUDIO

RX AUDIO

SIGNALING

CIRCUIT

E-LEAD

M-LEAD

SB

SG

TR1

RR1

T1

R1

Figure 14-5 TYPE II AND III

14.2.6 TYPE IV

This interface is a cross-connect between the trunk circuit and signaling circuit. Two conductors are signaling, four are balanced audio and two are System

Battery and System Ground. This type of interface has the M-Lead and System Battery cross-connected (see

Figure 14-6).

14.2.4 TYPE I AND V

A straight interconnect between the trunk circuit and signaling circuit. Two conductors are signaling

and four are balanced audio (see Figure 14-4 ).

TRUNK

CIRCUIT

E-LEAD

M-LEAD

RNT

TX AUDIO

RX AUDIO

SIGNALING

CIRCUIT

E-LEAD

M-LEAD

TR1

RR1

T1

R1

Figure 14-4 TYPE I AND V

14.2.5 TYPE II AND III

A straight interconnect between the trunk circuit and signaling circuit. Two conductors are signaling, four are balanced audio and two are System Battery

and System Ground (see Figure 14-5).

TRUNK

CIRCUIT

E-LEAD

M-LEAD

SB

SG

RNT

TX AUDIO

RX AUDIO

SIGNALING

CIRCUIT

E-LEAD

M-LEAD

SB

SG

TR1

RR1

T1

R1

Figure 14-6 TYPE IV

14.2.7 TYPE II TRUNK-TO-TRUNK

Some applications may require an interface to another trunk circuit (e.g. PBX). This interface is a cross-connect between trunk circuits. Two conductors are signaling, four are balanced audio and two are

System Battery (SB) and System Ground (SG). The

System Battery and System Ground are cross-

connected with the E-Lead and M-Lead (see 14-

7Figure 14-6).

14-6


TRUNK

CIRCUIT

M-LEAD

SB

SG

E-LEAD

RNT

TX AUDIO

RX AUDIO

SIGNALING

CIRCUIT

M-LEAD

SB

SG

E-LEAD

TR1

RR1

T1

R1

Figure 14-7 TYPE II TRUNK-TRUNK

Figure 14-9 E&M PERSONALITY BOARD

14.2.8 TYPE V TRUNK-TO-TRUNK

This interface is a cross-connect between the trunk circuits. Four conductors are balanced audio and the M-Lead and E-Lead conductors are cross-

connected (see Figure 14-8).

TRUNK

CIRCUIT

E-LEAD

M-LEAD

RNT

TX AUDIO

RX AUDIO

SIGNALING

CIRCUIT

E-LEAD

M-LEAD

TR1

RR1

T1

R1

Figure 14-8 TYPE IV TRUNK-TRUNK

14.3.2 E&M LOGIC STATUS

The status of E&M Logic can be monitored on

CR401 (E-Lead) and CR403 (M-Lead) of the main

board (see Figure 14-10). These are logic levels that

display the true status of the E&M leads. If either LED is illuminated, that lead is active. Both LEDs should not illuminate in the idle state.

14.3 LED STATUS FOR E&M LEADS

14.3.1 TELCO SIDE STATUS

The Telco Side Status can be monitored on

CR206 (M-Lead) and CR204 (E-Lead) see Figures

14-9 and 14-21. These LEDs are used to show a status

change on the Telco side of the E&M Personality

Board. In some instances either or both could be illuminated in the idle state.

14-7

Figure 14-10 MAIN BOARD


14.4 E&M LEAD CIRCUIT THEORY OF

OPERATION

14.4.1 E&M INTERFACE

This card was designed to mate with any of the five available E&M signaling formats. E&M signaling usually requires a -48V supply with positive ground and must have some type of current limiting available. Q205 and Q204 are a bipolar constant current source used for current limiting.

CR201, CR202 and CR203 are 68V, 0.5W zener diodes that act with RV202-RV208 to provide electrostatic discharge protection. These devices ground any voltage spikes caused from back-EMF associated with driving relay type E&M systems.

The basic switching for this card comes from

Q202/Q203 (a complementary Darlington pair). With

S201 (8-position DIP switch) the relative configura-

tion of Q202/Q203 can be manipulated. Figure 14-11

is an “equivalent switching” diagram for a TYPE III configuration.

The drive for Q202 and Q203 is from optoisolators U213/U214. Q206 is used only in Type V interface where an inversion is required to drive Q202.

The E-Lead current sensor consists of current limit resistor R219 and an optoisolator U212. CR205 is for reverse voltage protection for the optoisolator and LED CR204.

Figure 14-11 TYPE III INTERFACE

14.4.2 SIGNAL CONDITIONING

Q201 inverts the logic to the Schmitt buffer

U211. The buffer output is used to charge and discharge C227 through R230 and the series output resistance of CMOS gate U211. When the buffer is on,

C227 is charged through R230 which sets up an exponential ramp voltage on C227. R231/R232 set a reference of 2.17V and R233/R234 set a reference at 2.86V.

As C227 is charging from 0 to +5V the comparator sequentially trips causing U213 to trip first and U214

to trip ~ 0.3 ms later (see Figure 14-12).

Figure 14-12 CHARGING CHARACTERISTIC

OF C227

When a "0" is written to Q201 the reverse action occurs with the discharge of C227 through R230. The reason for this sequencing is to emulate a "breakbefore-make" switch. By sequencing the drive to the optoisolators U204 becomes an equivalent SPDT switch. When the output of the comparators goes low, they activate U213/U214.

The E-Lead output from U212 is debounced by dual retriggerable monostable multivibrator U210. It is configured as two one-shot multivibrators with RC time constants of 5 ms and 10 ms respectively. This circuit debounces transients in both E-Lead signal states (low or high).

The first one-shot multi vibrator is used to debounce a transient “1” during a logic “0”. The Q output of the first one-shot is NANDed with its input

(R221/C226 are used to eliminate a possible race condition that may occur through the one-shot) in which the output of U211, pin 3 goes low only when the input pulse width exceeds 5 ms. This output is fed into U210, pin 12 which is being retriggered by the

14-8

TELEPHONE INTERFACE MODULE (TIM) oscillator of U211 running at

≈

3.7 kHz. With U244, pin 12 low the output of U210, pin 9 is a “1” (U210, pin 12 is constantly being retriggered). If a transient

“0” during a logic “1” is encountered at the E-Lead,

U210, pin 7 is retriggered causing U211, pin 3 to go high for 5 ms. This will not change the output of

U211, pin 9 because it is being retriggered. If U211, pin 3 stays high longer than 10 ms, U211, pin 9 goes low. For this to occur, the transient would need to exceed 10 ms.

Figure 14-13 4-WIRE E&M BLOCK DIAGRAM (-680)

14-9


Figure 14-14 DT & MBS PERSONALITY CARD BLOCK DIAGRAM (-670)

Figure 14-15 DID PERSONALITY CARD BLOCK DIAGRAM (-660)

14-10


14.5 TIM SETUP PROCEDURE

There are two personality cards that may be setup

and aligned: (See Figures 14-19, 14-20 and 14-21.)

1. 2WY (new style) Section 14.6.

Part No. 023-3039-670

Reg. # ATHUSA-61094-MF-E

2. DID Section 14.8.

Part No. 023-3039-660

Reg. # ATHUSA-61904-MF-E

3. 4-Wire E&M Section 14.10

Part No. 023-3039-680

14.5.1 TIM JUMPER PLACEMENT

Table 14-3 TIM JUMPER PLACEMENT


J24

J27

P33

J36

1 to 2*

2 to 3

1 to 2

2 to 3*

1 to 2

3 to 4

5and 6

1 only

1 to 2

2 to 3



Not used


Not used



J14

J15

J21

J22



14.5.2 MAIN BOARD SWITCH SETTINGS

The TIM does not use secondary signaling for

Command and Control Communication (see Figure

14-18).

Table 14-4 TIM SWITCH SETTINGS


S1

S3

S4

S5

1

-

1

1

2

-

2

2

3

-

-

3

4

-

4

4

-

1

-

-

Close Sections

-

2

-

-

-

3

3

-

-

4

-

-

14.6 2WY SETUP AND ALIGNMENT


2WY card (023-3039-670) is to be setup and aligned according to the following procedures. The

023-3039-670 has been approved with the following

FCC number ATHUSA-61094-MF-E.

14.6.1 2WY JUMPER SETUP

Table 14-5 2WY JUMPER PLACEMENT


J204

J205

J206

1 to 2

2 to 3

2 only*

1 only*

1 to 2

1 only*

1 to 2

Loop Impedance

High impedance < 19k ohms

Low impedance < 150 ohms

Infinite impedance

Line default disable mode - RING

Open line

Default to ground

Line default disable mode - TIP

Open line

Default to ground

Battery or Ground Detect - TIP J207

J208

J209

J207

1 only

1 to 2*

2 to 3

1 to 2

2 to 3

J208

1 to 2

1 to 2*

1 to 2

2 to 3

2 to 3

1 to 2

1 only*

2WY Ground Start - Tip P1, pin 32,

Ring P1, pin 31


No detect

-12V or less

-7V or less

Not Used

-5V or more

Transmit Gain

No gain

+6 dB gain

14.6.2 2WY PRE-ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES

The Central Office (CO) typically provides a dial up Test Tone (TT) and a Silent Line (SL). A DDO or

2WY TIM can dial these numbers for alignment purposes when the modules are installed in a working system.

The TT from the CO is typically the maximum level the line will output or accept. The typical level is 0 dBm at the CO interface. The average level of speech on the line will typically be -13 to -16 dBm.

14-11


The TIM should be pre-aligned using the Basic

Board Module alignment procedures, Section 14-18.

Input With Personality Card Installed

1. Jumper T201, pin 8 to T202, pin 12.

2. Insert 1004 Hz at -12 dBm with a 600 ohm driving impedance into the EQU of J1.

3. Set S5 for Test 7 ( sections 1, 2 and 3 open, close 4).


5. Adjust R41 for -6 dBm

±

0.5 dB at J11.

6. Verify -6 dBm

±

1 dB at TP5.

7. Adjust R214 on the personality card for -12 dBm

±

1 dB at EP223 (DTMF input level).


±

1 dB at EP222.



Bandpass Filter and Pulse Detector


2. Insert 395 Hz at -12 dBm with a 600 ohm driving impedance into the EQU of J1. (The typical Dial

Tone is 380 + 440 Hz, the 395 Hz simulates this Dial

Tone.)

3. Set S5 for Test 7 (sections 1, 2 and 3 open, close 4).


5. Verify -6 dBm

±

0.5 dB at J11.

6. Verify -6 dBm

±

1 dB at TP5.

7. Adjust R210 on the personality card for 0 dBm

±

1 dB at EP222.

8. Adjust R257 for a peak level at U203, pin 7

(typically -1 dBm

±

1 dB).

9. Set Detector a. Measure EP225 with an oscilloscope.

b. Adjust R274 until EP225 is high ( >4V).

c. Adjust R274 until EP225 just goes low (< 0.8V).

d. Verify that EP226 is a square wave of the input waveform.



Output


2. Place a 600 ohm resistor in series with a non-polarized 2.2

µ

F capacitor in EQU J1.

3. Set S5 for Test 1 (1 open, close 2, 3 and 4).



±

0.5 dB at TP3.

6. Adjust R44 to be -9 dBm

±

1 dB at J12.

(This provides a maximum level of -13 dBm

±

2 dB across the line. The loss is due to the hybrid transformer. Verify the level across the 600 ohm resistor and 2.2

µ

F cap is -13 dBm

±

2 dB, measure with a balanced non-grounded AC voltmeter.)

7. Mobile Speech Detection a. Set S5 for Test 7 (section 1, 2, 3; open, close 4).


c. Insert 700 Hz into J2 EQU with a 600 ohm balanced ungrounded oscillator.

d. Set oscillator for -15 dBm at J201, pin 5.

e. Adjust R282 for -18 dBm

±

1 dB at EP227.

f. Adjust R286 (counterclockwise) for a peak at

U220, pin 7, -19 dBm

±

1 dB.

14-12

TELEPHONE INTERFACE MODULE (TIM) g. Adjust R293 until U204, pin 14 is high (> 4V).

h. Adjust R293 until U204, pin 14 just goes low

(< 0.8V).

i. Remove 700 Hz.

10.DTMF Output Level a. Jumper T201, pin 8 to T202, pin 12.

b. Set S5 for Test 3 (sections 1-2 open; close 3-4).

c. Reset the module, Press S2 and release.

d. Adjust R206 on the personality card for -12 dBm

±

0.5 dB at EP221. Verify the level across the 600 ohm resistor and 2.2

µ

F cap is -16 dBm

±

2 dB, measure with a balanced non-grounded AC voltmeter.

5. Set S5 for normal operation (all closed).


14.7 2-WAY TIM ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES

(-670)

Contact the Telephone Company and obtain the

Test Tone and Silent telephone numbers. The levels provided by the telephone company may be at different levels than stated in this procedure. Typically, the Central Office (CO) provides a Test tone at 0 dBm which represents a Maximum Level. There is a possibility that the level provided is an Average Level

(-12 dBm), the Voice Level can be above and below the Average Level. Some COs or PBXs use different

Maximum Levels.

The alignment tone in the Switch is -12 dB relative to maximum audio level within the Switch. This procedure is used to set the transmit level at a level that is -12 dB relative to the maximum audio level of the telephone line. Dial Tone is typically provided at about 1 dB above Average Voice. Some adjustments may be necessary to or from the phone line to allow for acceptable audio levels.

NOTE: Determine the Maximum Level being used by the CO or the equipment being connected to for proper alignment.

14.7.1 MAIN RECEIVE

1. Put the card under test into the extension card.

2. Insert the lineman's set into the MON (top) jack of

J1 and dial the Test Tone. Verify that Test Tone is heard.

3. Set S5 for Test 7 (sections 1, 2, 3 open, close 4).


5. Remove the lineman's set.

6. Insert a Transmission Test Set in the MON jack of

J1 and record the level. The level is ___ dBm. This is the line loss from the CO (assuming 0 dBm is being sent by the CO).

7. Record the level at J201, pins 1 and 3 (see Figure 14-

19). The level is _____ dBm.

8. Connect the Transmission Test Set or AC voltmeter to J11, adjust R41 for 0 dBm.

9. Verify 0 dBm,

±

1 dBm at TP5.

10.Adjust R214 on the personality card for

0 dBm,

±

1 dB at EP223 (assuming the DTMF level was -10 to -13 dB).

11. Adjust R210 on the personality card for

0 dBm,

±

1 dB at EP222.

14.7.2 DIAL TONE DETECTOR

1. Connect the meter to J11, momentarily remove the card from the slot and reinstall. This resets the card so the level and frequency of the dial tone can be measured.

2. Measure and record level and frequency at J11. The level is _____ dBm and frequency is _________Hz.

The frequency should be recorded only if it is different than the standard 350-440 Hz dial tone.

3. Continue to measure at J11. Insert the generate portion of the Transmission Test Set into the EQU jack (bottom) of J1.

14-13


4. Set the Transmission Test Set to generate 395 Hz. If non-standard dial tone frequencies are used, use the frequency measured in Step 14.

5. Adjust the generator until J11 is the same level as measured in Step 14.

6. Monitor J11, decrease the output of the Transmission Test Set until the level at J11 is 10 dB below the level in Step 17.

7. Adjust R210 on the personality card for

-6 dBm,

±

1 dB at EP222.

8. Adjust R257 for a peak reading at U203, pin 7.

9. Connect an oscilloscope or DC voltmeter to EP225.

Adjust R274 until EP225 is high, slowly adjust

R274 until EP225 just goes low.

10.Remove the Test Set from EQU jack.

11. Set S5 for 0 and reset the card by pressing S2. A 2 should be displayed on the front 7-segment display.

14.7.3 OUTPUT HYBRID ADJUST

1. Insert the lineman's set into the MON jack of J1 and dial the Silent telephone number. If a silent number is unavailable, call a nearby phone where the mouthpiece can be removed or covered to obtain a quiet termination.

2. Set S5 for Test 1 (section 1 open, 2, 3, 4 closed).

3. Reset the module and remove the lineman's set.

4. Connect the Transmission Test Set to J12 and adjust

R44 for a level -4 dB plus the level recorded in

Section 14.7.1, Step 6. There is 8 dB loss through

the hybrid.

Example 1:

Assume the CO maximum level is 0 dBm and that the Test Tone is sent at this level (0 dBm).

Assume the level measured in Section 14.7.1, Step 6 is

-7 dBm. This means there is 7 dB of line loss. The level at J12 should be set to 0 dBm as maximum level minus 12 dB for the Switch Alignment Tone relative to maximum level plus 8 dB for hybrid loss plus 7 dB for line loss for an Absolute Level of +3 dBm.

J12 = 0 dBm-12 dB+8 dB+7 dB = +3 dBm

Example 2:

Assume a PBX maximum level is sent at a

-10 dB relative level or an absolute level of -12 dB.

Assume the level measured in Section 14.7.1, Step 6 is

-15 dBm. This means there is 3 dB of line loss. The level at J12 should be set to -2 dBm as maximum level minus 12 dB for the Switch Alignment Tone relative to maximum level plus 8 dB for hybrid loss plus 3 dB for line loss for an Absolute Level of +3 dBm.

J12 = -2 dBm-12 dB+8 dB+3 dB = -3 dBm

5. Adjust Hybrid Balance by monitoring J11 with the

Transmission Test Set.

a. Switch in/out S201-S202 and adjust R261-R262 for a minimum level. b. Switch S201-S202 in or out until little change or degradation is noted. c. Tune R261-R262 for minimum, then switch

S201-S202 for minimum and again tune R261-

R262 for minimum. d. This process should be repeated several times.

The level should be -20 dB minimum (typically

≈

30 dB) from the level recorded in Step 7.

5. Set S5 for Test 3, (sections 1, 2 open, 3, 4 closed).

6. Connect the Transmission Test Set to EP221 and adjust R206 for -12 dBm.


8. Remove the card from the extender card and insert the card back into the appropriate slot. The card displays a "2" in the 7-segment display.

9. To display digits dialed on the system, to or from the

TIM and SNM on the Alarm Display, select the following:

14-14

F2 Manual Device Control/Setup

F4 User Setup

F6 Diagnostic Control

Y Displays digits in alarm display

Enter, Enter

Select F10 until the main menu is displayed

All digits, both in-bound and out-bound are displayed on the Alarm Display.

14.8 DID SETUP AND ALIGNMENT (-660)

14.8.1 DID PERSONALITY CARD JUMPER SET-

TINGS

Table 14-6 DID JUMPER PLACEMENT

JU

J205

Pin Description

Line default disable mode - RING

J206

J207

1 only*

1 to 2

1 only*

1 to 2

Open line

Default to ground

Line default disable mode - TIP

Open line

Default to ground

Dial Tone or Mobile Speech Det.

J208

J209

1 to 2

2 to 3

1 only*

Dial Tone Detect

Mobile Speech Detect

Not Used

Fuse Holder

Transmit Gain

1 to 2

1 only*

No Gain

+6 dB Gain

DID line connections - Tip, P1, pin 31

Ring, P1, pin 32



The Central Office (CO) typically provides a dial up Test Tone (TT) and a Silent Line (SL). The DID alignment is more difficult since the line does not allow outward dialing, but the DID can still be aligned.

The TT from the CO is typically the maximum level the line will output or accept. The typical level is 0 dBm at the CO interface. The average level of speech on the line will typically be -13 to -16 dBm.


The TIM should be pre-aligned using the Basic

Board Module alignment procedures, Section 7.3.

Input With Personality Card Installed

1. Insert 1004 Hz at -12 dBm with a 600 ohm driving impedance into the EQU of J1.

NOTE: Be sure to block the DC voltage provided by the

DID by using a non-polarized 2.2

µ

F capacitor with a working voltage greater than 63V.

2. Set S5 for Test 7 ( sections 1, 2 and 3 open, close 4).



±

0.5 dB at J11.

5. Verify -6 dBm

±

1 dB at TP5.


±

1 dB at TP203 (DTMF input level).



Output

1. Place a 600 ohm resistor in series with a non-polarized 2.2

µ

F capacitor, 63V breakdown or greater in

EQU of J1.

2. Set S5 for Test 1 (section 1 open, close 2, 3 and 4).



±

0.5 dB at TP3.


±

1 dB at J12.

(This provides a maximum level of -13 dBm

±

2 dB across the line. The loss is due to the hybrid transformer. Verify the level across the 600 ohm resistor and 2.2

µ

F cap is -13 dBm

±

2 dB, measure with a balanced non-grounded AC voltmeter.) a. DTMF Output Level: b. Set S5 for Test 3 (sections 1-2 open; 3-4 closed).


14-15

TELEPHONE INTERFACE MODULE (TIM) d. Adjust R206 on the personality card for -12 dBm

±

0.5 dB at EP221. Verify the level across the 600 ohm resistor and 2.2

µ

F cap is -16 dBm

±

2 dB, measure with a balanced non-grounded AC voltmeter.

7. Set S5 for normal operation (all closed).


14.9 DID OPERATIONAL ALIGNMENT


The DID line cannot dial numbers towards the

CO. This requires the card be pre-aligned and the levels from the CO are known. A known good working mobile or portable is required for the alignment of the DID line. Align the 2WY or DDO lines first to obtain the line loss from the CO.

Call a mobile or portable that is active in the system. Use a phone that can generate continuous

DTMF. Answer with the mobile or portable.

Receive

1. Press the "5" key on the DTMF phone.

This level should be about -6 dB from the Test

Tone on the transmitting phone. Verified by measuring the transmitting telephone using a high impedance ungrounded AC voltmeter across the line. Take note of this level relative to the CO Test Tone level. The level across the interface at the DID should be this level plus twice the line loss as measured when setting up a 2WY line.

2. Adjust R41 for the same relative level from +6 dBm at J11 as measured in Step 1.

3. Adjust R214 for the same relative level from +6 dBm at EP203 as measured in Step 1.

4. Release the "5" key.

Transmit (Revision 202 or Earlier.)

5. Inject 1004 Hz tone at the junction of C61 and R69 using a 0.1

µ

F cap in series with a 600 ohm oscillator. Adjust the oscillator level for a -3 dBm

±

0.5 dB level at TP3.

6. Adjust R44 to add 8 dB,

±

1 dB to the CO Test Tone level at J12. Verify that the level across the line is

-12 dB,

±

2 dB from the Test Tone level of the CO, use a balanced non-grounded AC voltmeter.

7. Verify the level at the telephone is clean and clear.

Remove or cover the mouthpiece.

8. Adjust the Hybrid balance by switching capacitor using S201 and S202 and adjusting R261 and R262 for a minimum level at J11, the Rx test point. (This is an iterative process. The level should be -20 dB from the CO Test Tone at this level.)

9. Remove the tone and speak over the telephone and

RF unit to ensure a clean and clear voice path.

NOTE: The mobile or portable must be keyed to transmit every 1 or 2 minutes for a brief period (1 or 2 seconds) to hold the connection.

Transmit (Revision 203 or Later)

1. Set S5 for Test 9 (1-4 open, 2-3 closed).

2. Reset the module. Press and release S2.

3. Call a number to the DID. The DID answers and places alignment tone on the line.


±

0.5 dB at TP3.

5. Adjust R44 to add 8 dB,

±

1 dB to the CO Test Tone level at J12. Verify that the level across the line is -

12 dB

±

2 dB from the Test Tone level of the CO, use a balanced non-grounded AC voltmeter.

6. Verify that the level at the telephone is clean and clear. Remove or cover the mouthpiece.

7. Adjust the Hybrid balance by switching capacitor using S201 and S202 and adjusting R261 and R262 for a minimum level at J11, the Rx test point. (This is an iterative process. The level should be -20 dB from the CO Test Tone at this level.)

8. Set S5 to 0 (close all sections) and reset the card for normal operation.

14-16


14.10 E&M SETUP AND ALIGNMENT (-680)

The standard audio signal is defined as a 1 kHz audio tone modulated at 2 kHz deviation, with data modulated at 1 kHz deviation (total deviation is

3 kHz).

Table 14-7 E&M MAIN BOARD JUMPERS


J24 1 to 2*

2 to 3

J27 1 to 2

2 to 3*

P33 1 to 2

3 to 4

5 and 6

J36 2 to 3



Not used


For E&M operation

J14

J15

J21

J22



Table 14-8 E&M JUMPER PLACEMENT

JU Pin

J207 1 to 2

2 to 3

J209 1 to 2

Description

Connects Dial Tone circuit

Removes Dial Tone circuit

Connects SG to Switch 0V (gnd)


1. Digital storage scope (Tektronix 2430 or equivalent with roll mode trigger capability from 100 ms to 1 second).

2. Printer or plotter for scope (recommended for sending data back to E.F. Johnson for analysis).

3. Telephone test set (Ameritec V.F. test set model

AM-44 or equivalent).

4. RF communications monitor.

5. Multi-Net Encoder/Decoder Box.

14.10.2 TRANSMIT ALIGNMENT

DTMF Transmit Level Adjust

1. Set S5 on the main board for Test 3

(sections 1 and 2 open, 3 and 4 closed).

2. Adjust R214 for -7 dB at TP201 (EP201). This sets the correct level of TX DTMF with respect to TX

Audio.

NOTE: After adjusting this level, DTMF and audio are adjusted together by R44 (TX+/TX-). TX+ DTMF

and audio are monitored at J12.

Transmit Audio Level Adjust

This procedure requires a fully tuned repeater for testing. Test this repeater by keying up in dispatch mode with a radio. Monitor the receive frequency and record the receive data level. Generate a DTMF 5 from the radio and record the total deviation of data + audio. Subtract the previous data level and record the audio level received.

Monitor the transmit frequency of the repeater.

Key up the radio and record the transmit data level.

Generate a DTMF 5 from the radio and record the total deviation of data + audio. Subtract the data level previously recorded and record the audio level received. This level of audio should be the same as the receive level. If not, retune the repeater before proceeding with this procedure.

Disable dial-tone detection in the Call Processor.

With a known good repeater, attempt to make a call to a test phone over the 4-Wire circuit. If the call did not go through, check digit timing parameters (pulse and

DTMF) or the level of DTMF transmitted at TX+/TX-

. Normally this level is -7 dBm (346 mV RMS or

978 mV P-P). If the 4-Wire requires a different level adjust R44 while monitoring the transmit level for the appropriate level.

Once the call is connected to a test phone (a phone located at the site provided the call went through the CO or PBX), collect the repeater using the

Multi-Net Encoder/Decoder box and communications monitor with a data level of 1 kHz. With the call still going, turn off the radio (do not pound '#' down the

14-17

TELEPHONE INTERFACE MODULE (TIM) call) and add in a 1 kHz tone at 2 kHz deviation

(3 kHz deviation total). Adjust the E&M transmit level at TX+/TX- using R44 to the appropriate level

(normally -7 dB).

NOTE: If the 4-Wire circuit requires a different level, adjust R44 to this level. If the circuit is a microwave link and is terminated into the CO or PBX with a 2-

Wire to 4-Wire termset module, the output level of this device should be -7 dBm at TIP and RING (a 1 kHz tone modulated at 2 kHz should = -7 dB at Tip and

Ring).

Figure 14-16 TRANSMIT DIAGRAM

14.10.3 RECEIVER ALIGNMENT

Receiver Audio Level Adjust

Tuning the receive path requires a 1 kHz tone at -

7 dB be injected across Tip and Ring of the test phone

(remote phone used in the transmit procedure). If the

CO requires a level higher or lower for receive average audio, adjust to this level (-7 dB is accepted by 90% of COs).

Monitor the transmit frequency of the test repeater and adjust R41 until 3 kHz of audio deviation is transmitted (2 kHz audio + 1 kHz data =

3 kHz total deviation).

With the tone still injected at the remote phone monitor RX+/RX- at J11 and record the level of audio received. This value is used in the Receive DTMF procedure that follows.

14.10.4 4-WIRE E&M DIAL TONE DETECTOR

RECEIVE ALIGNMENT

1. Disable Dial Tone Detection at the Call Processor.

Set the CO settle time to 750.

NOTE: This lengthens the time between going off-hook and dialing the first digit. Allow enough time to measure the level and frequency at J11 in Step 2.

2. With the telephone test set connected to J11 place a call. When dial tone is present measure and record the level and frequency at J11. The level is ____ dBm and the frequency is _____ Hz.

3. Continue to measure at J11. Insert the generate portion of the transmission test set into the EQU jack (bottom) of J1.

4. Set the transmission test set to generate the same frequency measured in Step 2.

5. Adjust the generator until J11 is the same level as measured in Step 2.

6. Monitor J11, decrease the output of the transmission test set until the level at J11 is 2 dB below the level in Step 2.

7. Adjust R207 on the personality card for -6 dBm,

±

1 dB at TP202.

8. Adjust R247 for a peak AC voltage or dB level reading at TP204.

9. Connect an oscilloscope or DC voltmeter to TP206.

Adjust R255 until TP206 is high, slowly adjust

R255 until TP206 just goes low.

10.Remove the test set from EQU jack.

11. Re-enable dial tone detection in the Call Processor.

Place a call to verify dial tone detection.

Receive DTMF Level Adjust

Inject DTMF across RX+/RX- (J11) at the level recorded in the Receive Audio Level Adjust above.

On the E&M personality board monitor TP203 and adjust R210 for -7 dB.

Figure 14-17 RECEIVE DIAGRAM

14-18


4

3

2

1

ON


14-19


Figure 14-19 DT & MBS ALIGNMENT POINTS DIAGRAM (-670)

14-20


Figure 14-20 DID ALIGNMENT POINTS DIAGRAM (-660)

14-21


Figure 14-21 4-WIRE E&M ALIGNMENT POINTS DIAGRAM (-680)

14-22


14.11 TERMSET MODULES

The Termset modules are used for converting a 2-

Wire, Loop Start (LS), Ground Start (GS) or Reverse

Burst (RB) circuit to a 4-Wire E&M for use with the

Switch 4-Wire E&M board.

14.11.1 EQUIPMENT SETUP

NOTE: Use Type V signaling on E&M for Tellabs cards.

14.11.2 INITIALIZING THE TELLABS CARDS

Switch Settings on 6132B (POTS Applications),

see Table 14-9. POTS lines use the Tellabs 6132B

Termset. Initialize the Termset switch settings, see

Figure 14-22.

Table 14-9 TELLABS 6132B - POTS

Sw Purpose

S14 Initially set to NORM. If the E-Lead (Green LED) stays on constantly, or the termset does not answer in-dial, place S14 in REV position. This switch reverses the battery polarity presented to the E&M card from the CO in POTS applications. BYPASS

(and removal of B subassembly) will allow 6132 to be used without signaling.

S5 Place in 2W. This switch determines the interface.

S4 To get started, set to 900, with all capacitors in. Set to variable and adjust R38 when performing the actual balance. This balance network allows 600,

900 or variable resistor (2k) resistive balance. Also,

5 capacitors ranging from .002

µ

F to .032

µ

F in octaves (i.e. .064

µ

F total capacitance) provide for a capacitive balance.

R38 This potentiometer controls the resistive balance in the variable mode of S4.

S12 Supervisory Mode. Set to GS (Ground Start), LS

(Loop Start), RB (Reverse Battery) allows the termset to detect battery reversal from the CO (if it is provided) which indicates hang-up).

S19 Set to sig for Loop Start, inv for Ground Start applications. This switch provides for normal (sig) or inverted (inv) E&M outputs.

S18 Set to sig. This switch provides for normal (sig) or inverted (inv) E&M inputs.

S11 Set to B. This switch swaps roles of E-Lead and M-

Lead.

S3 Set to 600. This switch provides 2W port terminating impedance.

S14

NORM

S5

2W

S4

900

ALL CAPS ON

R38

S3

600

TOP DOWN

S12

LS (LOOP START)

GS (GROUND START)

BOTTOM UP

S19

SIG (LOOP START)

INV (GROUND START)

S18

SIG

S11

B

Figure 14-22 TELLABS 6132B - POTS

14-23


14.11.3 SWITCH SETTINGS ON 6132A (DID AP-

PLICATIONS)

Table 14-10 TELLABS 6132A - DID

Sw Purpose

S14 Initially set to NORM. If the E-Lead (Green LED) stays on constantly, or the termset does not answer in-dial, place S14 in REV position. This switch reverses the battery polarity presented to the CO from the Termset in DID applications.

S5 Place in 2W. This switch determines the interface.

S4 To get started, set to 900, with all capacitors in. Set to variable and adjust R38 when performing the actual balance. This balance network allows 600,

900 or variable resistor (2k) resistive balance. Also,

5 capacitors ranging from .002

µ

F to .032

µ

F in octaves (i.e. .064

µ

F total capacitance) provide for a capacitive balance.

R38 This potentiometer controls the resistive balance in the variable mode of S4.

S11 Set to B. This switch swaps roles of E-Lead and M-

Lead.

S12 Supervisory Mode. Set to RB (Reverse Battery) for

DID applications.

S15 Set to a = inv, b = inv, c = d = e = off.

'a' sets up inverted E&M inputs.

'b' sets up inverted E&M outputs.

'c' sets up continuous (vs. interrupted ringing.

'd' sets up no ring-back tone.

'e' sets up no pulse correction.

S3 Set to 600. This switch provides 2W port terminating impedance.

S14

NORM

S5

2W

S4

900

ALL CAPS ON

R38

TOP DOWN

S11 B

S12

RB (REVERSE BURST)

S15 a = inv b = inv c = d = e = off

S3

600

BOTTOM UP

Figure 14-23 TELLABS 6132A - DID

14-24


14.11.4 XEL TERMSET RACK

Set up the equipment shown in Figures 14-24,

14-25 and 14-26.

1. Ensure that the jumpers have been installed on the backside of the XEL rack, where the power plug

attaches (see Figure 14-24).

2. Ensure that there is a connection from Slot-12, pin

27 to the power connector ground pin (see Figure

14-24).

3. Attach the grounding strap to earth ground.

4. The XEL Rack requires -48V DC from the Switch.

See Figure 14-24 for wiring.

SWITCH-GND TO SLOT-12, PIN 27

CHASSIS GROUND

XEL RACK

-48V

FROM SWITCH

POWER FOR

SLOTS 1-6

6 5 4 3 2

POWER FOR

SLOTS 7-12

1 SLOTS 1-6

J1 CONNECTION TO CO

12 11 10 9 8 7 SLOTS 7-12

J2 CONNECTION TO CO

6 5 4 3 2 1 SLOTS 1-6

J3 CONNECTION TO E&M

12 11 10 9 8 7 SLOTS 7-12

J4 CONNECTION TO E&M

Figure 14-24 XEL TERMSET RACK (REAR CLOSE-UP)

14-25


14.11.5 CONNECTION TO THE PHONE LINES

1. Method 1: An RJ-11 harmonica to 50-pin connector J1 or J2. On the RJ-11 harmonica the slots 1-6 correspond to the RJ-11 jacks going from right to left as viewed from the back of the Termset

rack (see Figure 14-26).

2. Method 2: A punch down block and a 50-pin to 50pin cable that also attaches to J1 or J2. The phone lines then connect to the punch down block in positions corresponding to their location on the 50-pin connector.

Figure 14-25 TERMSET RACK (FRONT VIEW)

Figure 14-26 NETWORK LINK (SWITCH RACK BACK VIEW)

14-26


14.11.6 FINAL PATH INSPECTION

If all of the mechanical assembly has been made

properly, the connections in Table 14-11 should exist.

Table 14-11 E&M TO TERMSET

CONNECTIONS

SLOT 1

6132/Backplane [1] J3 [2] E&M DB-15 [3]

Pin # Signal Pin # Signal Pin #

41

47

7

13

21

23

Tx Tip

Tx Ring

Rx Tip

Rx Ring

M-Lead

E-Lead

26

1

27

2

29

28

Rx +

Rx Gnd

Tx +

Tx Gnd

E-Lead

M-Lead

1

6

8

10

13

14

SLOT 2

6132/Backplane [1] J3[2] E&M DB-15 [3]

Pin # Signal Pin # Signal Pin #

41

47

7

13

21

23

Tx Tip

Tx Ring

Rx Tip

Rx Ring

M-Lead

E-Lead

30

5

31

6

33

32

Rx +

Rx Gnd

Tx +

Tx Gnd

E-Lead

M-Lead

[1] Information from Page 10 of 6132 handout,

corresponds to page 5 of rack handout.

[2] Information from Page 4 (Table 3) of rack handout.

[3] Information from E&M card schematics.

1

6

8

10

13

14

14.12 BACKGROUND INFORMATION

14.12.1 STANDARD SIGNAL

The standard signal is defined as a 1 kHz audio tone modulated to

±

2 kHz deviation, with data modulated to

±

1 kHz (total deviation is

±

3 kHz).

14.12.2 OUTLINED OBJECTIVE

The specific technical purposes of tuning the repeater and 4-Wire E&M are to ensure:

1. The RF hardware is properly tuned.

2. Data levels (LTR and high speed) are properly set, both in/out of the Radio Concentrator.

3. In dispatch mode, Audio In = Audio out of the repeater.

4. Levels transmitted to and received from the CO are given adequate gain.

5. The hybrids interfacing system equipment to the CO are properly balanced.

6. The links all have unit gain across them.

7. Interconnect and Dispatch audio are at the same level (in terms of Exciter deviation).

The purpose of tuning the Switch is to ensure all audio coming into the Switch, either from an RF channel, a Telco resource, or a Network Link, bus at the same level. In other words, regardless of where audio originates, the amplitude is the same level in the

Switch. Once achieved, the Switch directs the audio

in from any resource out to any other resource with all the proper levels.

Standard audio received from a mobile is defined in terms of

±

2 kHz of audio deviation (

±

3 kHz total).

Defining standard audio from the Central Office (CO) is not as simple. It ranges from -10 to -30 dBm, depending on distance from the CO and line quality.

One objective of the tuning procedure is to determine the level of average audio from the CO, and to normalize that level.

Tuning the system ensures that

±

2 kHz of audio received from a mobile results in the same level on the backplane as does the CO standard level.

Once the levels are properly set,

±

2 kHz of audio deviation is injected into the receiver and

±

2 kHz of audio deviation is transmitted from the

Exciter (dispatch). Also, standard audio coming in from the CO results in

±

2 kHz of audio deviation transmitted from the Exciter (interconnect). Finally,

±

2 kHz of audio deviation injected into the Receiver results in a standard audio level transmitted to the CO.

14.12.3 THE ORDER OF THINGS

First, properly tune the RF equipment. Next, the repeater (dispatch) channels.

±

2 kHz of audio in, gives

±

2 kHz of audio out.

14-27


Once the repeater channel is tuned, it is used as a tool in tuning the interconnect channel. Average audio transmitted to the CO is defined as -7 dBm.

±

2 kHz of audio deviation in from a repeater is transmitted to the CO at a level of -7 dBm. Similarly, -7 dBm going to the CO from a remote location results in

±

2 kHz of audio transmitted from the Exciter. The level at tip and ring locally, with -7 dBm injected remotely, is the average audio level from the CO (-10 to -30 dBm, typically -20 dBm).

14.13 TUNING A DOD OR DID 2-WIRE INTER-

FACE TO THE 4-WIRE E&M BOARD.

Refer to Figure 14-27 for this Section.

1. Establish an interconnect to a remote location, using the DOD or DID line to be tuned.

2. Collect the call with a service monitor and encoder box. Data level is 1 kHz.

3. Turn the radio off (do not end call). Monitor and encoder are now collecting the call.

4. Inject a standard tone (

±

2 kHz audio) into the receiver.

5. Use a bantam jack to monitor Tip and Ring (2-Wire

transmit in/monitor) at the Termset (see Figure 14-

28).

6. Adjust R44 (Tx Gain) on the E&M Main Board for a level of -7 dBm (346 mV RMS, 978 mV P-P) at

Tip and Ring of the Termset. If R44 does not have enough range, use dip switches on Tellabs cards for more adjustment.

7. Adjust the balance circuit of the Termset (see

Figures 14-22 or 14-23) for minimum Exciter devi-

ation or RMS voltage at J11 on the E&M Main

Board. See Section 14.14 for additional information

on reflected energy levels from the CO.

Figure 14-27 E&M INTERFACE

14-28


Figure 14-28 TELLABS 6132A/B TERMSET

8. A good way to measure the effectiveness of the balance across the Tellabs hybrid is to send a tone towards the CO and measure the energy reflected. A clear way of accomplishing this is to establish an interconnect, then inject a 1 kHz tone at

±

2 kHz modulation into the Receiver. With

±

2 kHz of audio going in towards the CO, measure the amount reflected out of the Exciter with a communication monitor or measure pin 1 with respect to pin 7 on the

E&M card. A good balance, usually with the addition of a 0.033

µ

F capacitor across the Tellabs balance network, will result in virtually nothing but data coming out of the Exciter. A very poor balance can send the Exciter to the limiter. A breakdown follows:

Reflected Energy Balance Quality

Above Data

0-200 Hz

(Out of Exciter

Receive on E&M

0-16 mV RMS)

Great. No further adjustments are necessary.

200-500 Hz Good. Try to lower this by

(16-37 mV RMS) placing additional capacitance

(0.033

µ

F, non-polarized caps) in parallel with the Termset

LSB cap. This system, however, will sound good with no further adjustments.

500-1500 Hz Poor. Definitely try to lower

(37-86 mV RMS) this reflected energy by adding capacitance to the balance circuit.

1.5-4 kHz Unusable. More energy is

(86 mV-1V RMS) reflected than is sent into the

CO. May be acceptable if all users are half-duplex. A full duplex radio will not work on this system.

Reflected Energy Balance Quality

Above Data

>4 kHz

(>1V RMS)

Reset the limiter on the

Exciter. The balance is poor and a maladjusted audio limiter.

9. After the reflected is minimized, check the Tx level to the CO for -7 dBm.

10.Turn off the tone, but keep the call going.

11. Inject a 1 kHz tone onto Tip and Ring at the remote location. A good remote location would be the SMR operator's shop (vs the operator's site), or any CO exchange other than the one at the site. Inject the tone into Tip and Ring using a Telephone Test Set.

Setup the remote location for a 1 kHz tone at -7 dBm

(346 mV RMS, 978 mV P-P) on Tip and Ring at the remote location.

NOTE: If a remote location is not used for injecting onto Tip and Ring, interconnect and dispatch levels will likely be different. Typically, if audio is injected from a telephone line of the same CO exchange and the Exciter deviation set for

±

2 kHz of audio, the same level injected into a line from a different exchange will result in less than

±

2 kHz of audio from the Exciter.

Injection can be done locally as long as the difference is made up by placing dispatch and interconnect calls and comparing the levels. Make up for differences using the Tellabs Termset dip switches.

14-29


12.Monitor the Exciter deviation.

13.Adjust R41 (Rx Audio) on the E&M Main Board such that

±

3 kHz is transmitted from the Exciter (

±

1 kHz data +

±

2 kHz audio).

14.Make several calls, interconnect and dispatch comparing the levels. Make minor adjustments as needed to ensure interconnect and dispatch are the same level. While the E&M Main Board potentiometers can be used for this fine tuning, it will be more convenient to use the Termset dip switches.

15.Remove the tone from Tip and Ring, and tear down the call. This telephone line is now tuned such that: a.

±

2 kHz into the Receiver results in -7 dBm at

Tip and Ring.

b. Standard audio from the CO results in

±

2 kHz

Exciter audio transmitted.

c. Network equipment is balanced to the telephone lines.

d. Interconnect/Dispatch levels are equal.

These figures show that it may be necessary to add additional capacitance to the 6132 balance circuit to improve the balance.

14.14.3 ADDING CAPACITANCE TO THE

TERMSET

Capacitance may be added to the Termset (see

Figure 14-29) by soldering non-polarized, 0.033

µ

F capacitors in paralleled with the capacitors in the balance circuit of the Tellabs Termsets. Start with the least significant capacitor (0.002

µ

F) and work towards the most significant if necessary. See the handout for the 6132 for the locations of these capacitors.

14.14.4 RURAL AREAS

It will be typical of rural sites to find that the 2-

Wire line leading to the CO (and, eventually, another hybrid to convert to 4-Wire for the telephone company) is longer than 4000 feet. When this is the case, the capacitance in the Tellabs balance circuit is inadequate for the task. If all of the Termset capacitors have been placed in line to minimize the balance, then try placing (soldering) additional capacitors across the LSBs of the Tellabs cards as described above.

14.14 BALANCING TO THE CENTRAL OFFICE

14.14.1 INTRODUCTION

Tellabs places a circuit on their Termsets that balances to 4k/ft of standard 2-Wire line. This is 24 gauge cable with specification of 0.016

µ

F/1000 ft.

That's why Tellabs provides a total of 0.064

µ

F of capacitance in their balance circuit.

14.14.2 STATISTICS

The Tellabs 6132 has a maximum line drive capability of 7.2 miles. The capacitance specification for 24 gauge (commonly used) station cable is

0.044 µF/mile. The maximum capacitance of a line will therefore be 7.2 x 0.084 mF = 0.605 mF. But, the maximum capacitance of a 6132 balance circuit is

0.064 µF.

14.14.5 URBAN AREAS

In other cases, there may not be enough cable between the Termset hybrid and the CO hybrid. Near large building (e.g. hotels, office buildings, etc.) the

CO will place a SLIC pedestal, or digital switcher. In these cases, there may only be a few hundred feet between the Tellabs hybrid and the CO hybrid. This is likely the case if, when balancing, the addition of any capacitance at all degrades the balance. All that can be done to minimize reflected energy is using the variable resistor of the 6132 balance circuit.

14-30


S5

TOP

S4 S4

R34

FRONT

ADDED CAPS

Figure 14-29 6132 TELLABS CARD

14.15 FCC USER INSTRUCTIONS AND

CUSTOMER INFORMATION

NOTE: This information does not apply to the 4-Wire

E&M. The 4-Wire E&M does not direct connect to the telephone company equipment.

In order to connect a DID or 2WY system to the network, provide the telephone company with:

1. The quantities and USOC numbers of the required

jacks (Table 14-12).

2. The sequence for trunk connections.

3. The facility interface codes by position.

have assurance that all devices ring properly when called. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the RENs of all devices should not exceed 5.0. To be certain of the number of devices you may connect to each line, call the local Telco and request the maximum allowable REN for the calling area.

If any of your telephone equipment causes harm to the network, the Telco may discontinue your service. If possible, you will be notified in advance, otherwise you will be notified as soon as possible.

You will also be advised of your rights to file a complaint with the FCC.

The Telco may make changes in its facilities, equipment operations, or procedures, that could affect the proper operation of your equipment. Advance notice will be given to provide an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service.

4. The ringer equivalence number or service order code, as applicable, by the position.

This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. A label with the FCC registration number and

Ringer Equivalence number (as applicable) for this equipment is on the rear access door.

In the event repairs are needed on this equipment, please contact: E.F. Johnson Co., Customer Service

Department, Waseca, MN 56093-0514.

The REN (as applicable to the service provided by the Telco) is used to determine the number of devices you may connect to the telephone line and still

FCC rules prohibit the connection of customer provided equipment to central office implemented coin telephone service. Connection to party lines is subject to state tariffs. (Contact your state public service commission for information.)

Table 14-12 SYSTEM INFORMATION

TYPE OF INTERFACE

DID (-660 Card Interface)

Loop/Ground Start (PSTN) (-670) Card Interface

Reg # ATHUSA-61094-MF-E

USOC

RJ-21X

RJ-21X

REN

------

2.3B(AC)

SOC

9.0F

9.0F

FIC

02V2-T

02LS2/02GS2

14-31



14-32

VOTER DIAGNOSTICS MODULE (VDM)

SECTION 15 VOTER DIAGNOSTICS MODULE (VDM)




for the Basic Board block diagram. The Voter Diagnostics Module (VDM) controls the receiver voter system. This module communicates to the Call

Processor via the Intra-Terminal Data Bus (IDB) and to the Receiver Voter Module(s) (RVM) via the Voter

Control Bus (VCB). Voice communication does not take place on this module.

Refer to Voter Manual 001-3139-500 for more information on the VDM and the Voter system.

The VDM has the ability to enable and disable channels and sites, to inquire on the received signal strengths, and receive alarms from the RVMs.

15.2 VDM SETUP PROCEDURE



Diagram.

Command and Control Communication


RVMs is by 1200 baud RS-232 data communication to the VCB via the secondary lines.

CALL

PROCESSOR

NETWORK

INTRA-TERMINAL

DATA BUS

(NetIDB)

NETWORK

CHANNEL

STATUS BUS

(NetCSB)

NetNIM

NETWORK

INTERFACE

MODULE

ETHERNET

BUS



(CIB)


(CIB)

LOGGING RECORDER

CHANNEL

INTERFACE

MODULE

CIMs

CONVENTIONAL

CHANNEL

MODULE

CCMs

WIDE

AREA

MODULE

WAMs

LOGGING

ENCODER

MODULE

LEMs

PSTN OR PABX

TELEPHONE

INTERFACE

MODULE

TIMs

SYSTEM

NETWORK

MODULE

SNMs

DISPATCH

CHANNEL

MODULE

DCMs




15-1


S1

S3

S4

S5

Table 15-1 VDM SWITCH SETTINGS

Switch Open Sections Close Sections

Digital Communication Using Secondary

Lines.

-

-

1

1

-

-

2

2

3

-

-

-

4

-

4

-


1

1

-

-

2

2

-

-

-

3

3

3

-

4

-

4

Table 15-2 VDM BOARD JUMPER

PLACEMENT


J24 1 to 2

2 to 3*

J27 1 to 2

2 to 3*

P33 1 to 2*

3 to 4*

5

6

J36 1 only*

1 to 2

2 to 3



Not Used

Normal Operation



Not used



J14

J15

J21

J22



15.2.3 VDM BACKPLANE EXTERNAL

CONTACTS



Backplane


Description

Sec Rx +

Sec Rx -

EA lead

EB lead

Pri Rx Audio+



Sec Tx +

Sec Tx -

MA lead

MB lead

Pri Tx Audio+


Wire Harness

J1,3,5,7

Signal

Ground

Signal

Ground


15.3 VDM ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS

No alignment is required for the VDM. The setup procedures are to make the proper switch settings and connections.

Figure 15-2 VDM I/O CONNECTIONS

15-2

4

3

2

1

ON



15-3



15-4

POWER TERMINATION MODULE (PTM)

SECTION 16 POWER TERMINATION MODULE (PTM)


The Power Termination Module (PTM) provides loading of the Data Communication Busses (DCB) and PCM busses for each shelf. The PTM also provides each shelf with fuse protection for supply voltages.


Table 16-1 S5/S7 SWITCH TERMINATION

SETTINGS

S5 - IDB Data (37.5 ohms)

S7 - CSB Data (37.5 ohms)

Number of Shelves Switch Sections Closed

14

15

16

17

10

11

12

13

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

ALL

1,3,6,7

1

2,4,5,6,7

2,5,6,7

2,7

3,4,5,6,7

3,4,6,7

3,4

3,5,6

3,5

3,6

3,7

3

4,5,6,7

4,5,6,7

4,5,6

4,5,7

4,5

4,5

4,6,7

4,6,7

4,6

Table 16-2 S6/S8 SWITCH TERMINATION

SETTINGS

S6 - IDB Idle (100 ohms)

S8 - CSB Idle (100 ohms)

Number of Shelves Switch Sections Closed

14

15

16

17

10

11

12

13

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

18

19

20

21

22

23

1,2,4,5

4,5

1,2,4,5

1,4,5

1,2,5

1,2,5

2,5

5

8

4,5,7

1,2,6

5,6

2,5,6

1,3,6

6

2,3,4,5

5

1,2,3,4

1,2,3,4

1,2,3,4

3,4

3,4

16-1

POWER TERMINATION MODULE (PTM)

Figure 16-1 POWER TERMINATION MODULE ALIGNMENT POINTS DIAGRAM

16-2

LOGGING ENCODER MODULE (LEM)

SECTION 17 LOGGING ENCODER MODULE (LEM)




the Basic Board block diagram. The Logging Encoder

Module (LEM) is the interface that performs the data collection and outputs of information for recording voice traffic.

The LEM communicates with the other modules via the Intra-Terminal Data Bus (IDB) and monitors the Channel Status Bus (CSB) for the groups set up to use the LEM. The LEM is configured to monitor up to five channels for information. The LEM converts the

CSB information for the five channels and outputs

1200 baud AFSK to a logging recorder. There may be up to six LEMs in a Switch to cover up to thirty channels.

CALL

PROCESSOR

NETWORK

INTRA-TERMINAL

DATA BUS

(NetIDB)

NETWORK

CHANNEL

STATUS BUS

(NetCSB)

NetNIM

NETWORK

INTERFACE

MODULE

ETHERNET

BUS



(CIB)


(CIB)

LOGGING RECORDER

CHANNEL

INTERFACE

MODULE

CIMs

CONVENTIONAL

CHANNEL

MODULE

CCMs

WIDE

AREA

MODULE

WAMs

LOGGING

ENCODER

MODULE

LEMs

PSTN OR PABX

TELEPHONE

INTERFACE

MODULE

TIMs

SYSTEM

NETWORK

MODULE

SNMs

DISPATCH

CHANNEL

MODULE

DCMs




17-1


17.2 LEM SETUP PROCEDURE

17.2.1 LEM SWITCH SETTINGS


Table 17-1 LEM SWITCH SETTINGS


S1

S3

S4

S5

1

-

1

1

2

-

2

2

3

-

-

3

4

-

4

4

-

1

-

-

Close Sections

-

2

-

-

-

3

3

-

-

4

-

-

Table 17-3 LEM EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS

Backplane

P34 to P45 Description pin 27 pin 28 pin 29 pin 30 pin 31 pin 32

Sec Rx +

Sec Rx -

EA lead

EB lead

Pri Rx Audio+


Sec Tx +

Sec Tx -

MA lead

MB lead

Pri Tx Audio+


TxS+

TxS-

MA

MB

TxA+

TxA-

Wire Harness


RxS+

RxS-

EA

EB

RxA+

RxA-

J2,4,6,8

17.2.2 LEM JUMPER PLACEMENT

Table 17-2 LEM JUMPER PLACEMENT


J24 1 to 2*

2 to 3

J27 1 to 2

2 to 3*

P33 1 to 2

3 to 4

5 and 6

J36 1 only

1 to 2

2 to 3



Not used


Not used



J14

J15

J21

J22



17.2.3 LEM BACKPLANE EXTERNAL

CONTACTS



The main transmit audio of the LEM is the only external connection that is required. This connects to the logging recorder.

17.3 LEM ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS


The LEM is pre-aligned with the Basic Board

Module alignment procedures. Refer to Section 7.3.

17.3.2 LEM ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE

The main transmit audio of the LEM is the only connection to the logging recorder. Good alignment practice should be followed and the module should be adjusted accordingly.

Connections to the LEM are:


2. Leased Lines

3. Microwave Link



17-2

Main Transmit





Step 1 at J12.

5. Set S5 for Test 8 (open section 4, close 1, 2 and 3).



±

0.5 dB at TP4.

8. Verify the level at J12 to be -12 dB

±

1 dB from the maximum level from Step 1.




J12 for -28 dBm.


17-3


4

3

2

1

ON


17-4

VOICE TONE MODULE (VTM)

SECTION 18 VOICE TONE MODULE (VTM)


The Voice Tone Module (VTM) provides tone and voice message to modules that indicate call progress to the users.

The VTM contains 8-fixed slots of digitized

PCM audio messages stored in PROMs that are 4 seconds in length and repeat continuously on the VTM

PCM bus of the Switch (see Table 18-3). The start of

the message is indicated in the transmission so modules can present the audio message to the user from the beginning of the message. There may be up to four VTMs within a system, depending upon the messages required.

18.2.2 VTM SWITCH SETTINGS

Table 18-2 VTM BOARD SWITCH SETTINGS

Switch

VTM starting slot

Sections

1 2

S1 0*

8**

16

24

Closed

Open

Closed

Open

S2 - Monitor Switch. A front panel,

16-position switch with two positions for

each slot. The switch selects the slot to

be monitored at the front panel jacks.

S3 - Reset. Normally open, press to reset.

Momentary switch to reset module.

* VTM 1

** VTM 2.

Closed

Closed

Open

Open


18.2.1 VTM JUMPER PLACEMENT

JU

Table 18-1 VTM BOARD JUMPER

Pin

PLACEMENT

Description

J11

J12

2 to 2*

3 to 3*

1 to 1

3 to 3



1 to 1

3 only

J20 1 to 2

2 to 3*


Transmit PCM Bus line

VTM PCM Bus line


18.3 ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS

No alignment is required for the VTM to operate in the system. However, panel jack output level is adjustable. The S1 switch setting must be correct for the starting slot number. Use S2 to select a voice or tone message.

1. Insert a "butt-set" in the front panel jack.

2. Adjust R22 for a comfortable listening level.

3. If a tone is selected, set the level at TP1, 9 dB lower than the level on U24, pin 2 for the proper level to the "butt-set".

NOTE: Revision 2 or earlier should have the line from

P1, pin 1 to R25 cut. Revision 3 or later should have

Jumper on -pin 1 only.

18-1


VOICE TONE MODULE BUS

TX/RX PCM

VTM

VOICE

TONE

MODULE

CHANNEL

INTERFACE

MODULE

CIMs

CONVENTIONAL

CHANNEL

MODULE

CCMs

WIDE

AREA

MODULE

WAMs

LOGGING

ENCODER

MODULE

LEMs

TELEPHONE

INTERFACE

MODULE

TIMs

SYSTEM

NETWORK

MODULE

SNMs

DISPATCH

CHANNEL

MODULE

DCMs

MASTER SYNC / MASTER CLOCK

Figure 18-1 VOICE BUSES

U4

U5

U6

U7

U8

U9

U10

EPROM

U3

U4

U5

U6

U7

U8

U9

U10

U3

PART NO.

023-9998-132

023-9998-211

023-9998-137

023-9998-140

023-9998-212

023-9998-184

023-9998-213

023-9998-214

023-9998-215

023-9998-145

023-9998-146

023-9998-147

023-9998-216

023-9998-217

Table 18-3 VTM PCM BUS MESSAGES

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

13

14

15

9

10

11

12

SLOT DESCRIPTION

VTM 1

Silence with the PCM M-Lead set, Data of 0ffH

Busy Tone, 480 Hz and 620 Hz at -3 dBm at a 0.5 second ON and 0.5 second

OFF rate with continuous PCM M-Lead set.

Intercept, 480 Hz at -13 dBm for 0.5 second, then 620 Hz at -13 dBm for 0.5 second rate with continuous PCM M-Lead set.

Alignment Tone, 1020 Hz at -6 dBm continuous with continuous PCM M-Lead set.

Dial Tone, 350 Hz and 440 Hz at -3 dBm continuous with continuous PCM M-

Lead set.

1500 Hz at +6 dBm for 100 milliseconds with 750 Hz at +3 dBm for 100 milliseconds with continuous PCM M-Lead set.

Ringing Normal, 440 Hz and 480 Hz -3 dBm at a 1 second ON and 3 seconds

OFF rate with continuous PCM M-Lead set.

End Call Tone, 1020 Hz at -3 dBm, 3 beeps at 0.1 second on, 0.1 off, 0.1 on, 0.1 off, 0.1 on, off, with a PCM M-Lead start pulse. There is 8 beep sets in 4 seconds.

VTM 2

Queue Ringback Tone, 440 Hz and 480 Hz at -10 dBm at a 0.5 second ON and

0.5 second OFF rate with continuous PCM M-Lead set.

"The number you have dialed is not authorized."

"The system is busy."

"There are no lines available."

"Your call has been queued."

"You have been removed from the queue."

Reserved and Undefined.

Reserved and Undefined.

18-2

INJECTOR/

EXTRACTOR

S2 MONITOR SWITCH

ALARM (RED)

POWER (GRN)

GROUND (BLK)

TRANSMIT LEVEL

TEST POINT (RED)

TRANSMIT

INJECTOR/

EXTRACTOR

Figure 18-2 VTM CARD EDGE LAYOUT

18-3




18-4

WIDE AREA MODULE (WAM)

SECTION 19 WIDE AREA MODULE (WAM)




for the Basic Board block diagram.

The WAM communicates with the other modules via the Intra-Terminal Data Bus (IDB) and monitors the Channel Status Bus (CSB) for the groups setup to use the WAM.

The System and Subscriber Manager and Call

Processor configures the WAMs for the Site/Home/

Group ID combination for operation via the IDB. The

System and Subscriber Manager provides a list of up to 30 sets of Site/Home/Group ID information. The

System and Subscriber Manager can add a single set of Site/Home/Group ID information during operation of the WAM. The configuration can be made permanent or given a time to be active.

Once the WAM is configured, it begins call operation. The WAM monitors the CSB for activity of the configured Groups. The WAM receives the first active Group. The WAM acquires channels for the other Site/Home/Group IDs and switches or wraps the audio from the unit that is being received to the other

Groups or channels.

If a Group is active on a Site, the WAM activates the other associated Groups on their appropriate Sites.

Once the glare condition is ensured to be cleared, the

M-Lead and E-Lead are enabled so the received audio is passed to the external interface of the WAM and the

WAMs external M-Lead is activated.

When the received call goes idle the call goes into optional Hang Time, depending upon the System and Subscriber Manager configuration. When the

Hang Time expires the call is dropped, or released, and the M-Lead is deactivated.

If both the receive and the external interface are active, the WAM sums the two audios together for transmission.

CALL

PROCESSOR

NETWORK

INTRA-TERMINAL

DATA BUS

(NetIDB)

NETWORK

CHANNEL

STATUS BUS

(NetCSB)

NetNIM

NETWORK

INTERFACE

MODULE

ETHERNET

BUS



(CIB)


(CIB)

LOGGING RECORDER

CHANNEL

INTERFACE

MODULE

CIMs

CONVENTIONAL

CHANNEL

MODULE

CCMs

WIDE

AREA

MODULE

WAMs

LOGGING

ENCODER

MODULE

LEMs

PSTN OR PABX

TELEPHONE

INTERFACE

MODULE

TIMs

SYSTEM

NETWORK

MODULE

SNMs

DISPATCH

CHANNEL

MODULE

DCMs




19-1


19.2 WAM SETUP PROCEDURE

19.2.1 WAM SWITCH SETTINGS


Table 19-1 WAM SWITCH SETTINGS


S1

S3

S4

S5

1

-

1

1

2

-

2

2

3

-

-

3

4

-

4

4

-

1

-

-

Close Sections

-

2

-

-

-

3

3

-

-

4

-

-

19.2.2 WAM JUMPER PLACEMENT

Table 19-3 WAM EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS

Backplane


Description

Sec Rx +

Sec Rx -

EA lead

EB lead

Pri Rx Audio+


Sec Tx +

Sec Tx -

MA lead

MB lead

Pri Tx Audio+


Wire Harness

J1,3,5,7

TxS+ (MA2)

TxS- (MB2)

MA (MA1)

MB (MB1)

TxA+


RxS+

RxS-

EA

EB

RxA+

RxA-

J2,4,6,8

Table 19-2 WAM JUMPER PLACEMENT


J24 1 to 2

2 to 3*

J27 1 to 2

2 to 3*

P33 1 to 2

3 to 4

5 and 6

J36 1 only

1 to 2

2 to 3



Not used

Normal operation

Jumpered

Jumpered open

Not used



J14

J15

J21

J22



19.2.3 WAM BACKPLANE EXTERNAL

CONTACTS



NOTE: An ECO to the WAM allows for an additional

M-Lead output pair to the Backplane on TxS+ and

TxS- (P34 to P45, pins 59/60).

19.3 WAM ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATIONS


The WAM is pre-aligned with the Basic Board

Module alignment procedures; refer to Section 7.3.

19.3.2 WAM ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE

There are several external connections for the

WAM, and good alignment practice should be followed and the module should be adjusted accordingly.

Connections to the WAM may take several forms:

•

Direct Connection

•

Leased Lines

•

Microwave Link

•

T1 Channel Bank Interfaces


19-2

4

3

2

1

ON


19-3



Main Transmit





Step 1 at J12.




J12 for -28 dBm.

Main Receive


2. Select Test 1 (S5 open section 1, close sections

2, 3, 4).


4. Insert an alignment tone -12 dB from the level determined in Step 1 using a 600 ohm audio oscillator into EQU port of J1. Otherwise, set the ancillary equipment to send the alignment tone to the interface module.


6. Set S5 for normal operation (S5 all sections closed).


Example: Microwave has +7 dBm maximum output. Apply -5 dBm and set J11 for -6 dBm or apply +7 dBm, then set for +6 dBm.


Not used since the secondary line is not used.

19.4 WAM E&M-LEAD CONNECTIONS

NOTE: All WAM E&M Lead connection Examples and

Figures reflect only one WAM configuration (WAC) and only one Switch per location.

•

Duplication of the following Examples and Figures are required for multiple, simultaneous WACs.

•

Multiple Switches per location that are included in a WAC in any of the following Examples and

Figures need to daisy-chain E-Lead inputs and M-

Lead outputs and then connect them together. (An example that has one Location with three Switches

is shown in Figure 19-3.)

WAM/SWITCH 1

TXS+ (MA2)

TXS- (MB2)

MA

MB

EA

EB

MA

MB

EXTERNAL

CONNECTIONS

(SEE NOTE)

EA

EB

WAM/SWITCH 2

TXS+ (MA2)

TXS- (MB2)

MA

MB

EA

EB

WAM/SWITCH 3

TXS+ (MA2)

TXS- (MB2)

MA

MB

EA

EB

NOTE: EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS ARE THE INTERFACE TO

ANY ADDITIONAL LOCATIONS.

Figure 19-3 WAM E&M LEAD CABLE LAYOUT

1 LOCATION

19-4


WAM/SWITCH 1

TXS+ (MA2)

TXS- (MB2)

MA

MB

EA

EB

LINK EQUIPMENT

EA

EB

LINK EQUIPMENT

EA

EB

MA

MB

MA

MB

LOCATION 1 LOCATION 2

Figure 19-4 WAM E&M LEAD CABLE LAYOUT 2 LOCATIONS

WAM/SWITCH 2

TXS+ (MA2)

TXS- (MB2)

MA

MB

EA

EB

19.4.1 ONE LOCATION

When only one WAM is used no E&M Lead external connections are necessary.

19.4.2 TWO LOCATIONS

Cross-connecting between the Switches/Links requires the use of the additional WAM M-Lead output

(see Figure 19-4).

19.4.3 THREE LOCATIONS

A WAC that consists of three or more Locations with Switches/WAMs at each requires the use of the

M-Lead Splitter Box (see Section 19-5). The Splitter

Box splits one M-Lead input into six M-Lead outputs.

Seven boxes would allow a total of seven Locations with Switches/WAMs at each to participate in a WAC before needing a second box per Location (see

Figure 19-6).

NOTE: The M-Lead Splitter Boxes are needed only at the Locations where two or more E&M Links connect

to WAMs. Notice in Figure 19-3 that the M-Lead

Splitter Box is not needed since there is only one E&M

Link interface.

19.5 M-LEAD SPLITTER BOX

19.5.1 GENERAL

The M-Lead Splitter Box Kit (PN 250-3239-300) is to be used with WAMs that allow Wide Area Calls

(WAC) over links that utilize 4-Wire E&M Lead circuits. The M-Lead Splitter Box (PN 023-3239-300) provides up to six M-Lead outputs with one M-Lead input.

19.5.2 INSTALLATION

The box is powered by +12V on pin 1. The +12V supply can be obtained from the Switch Bus Bar. The spades of the cable (PN 023-3239-320) in the kit are connected to the bus bar (Red to +12V, Black to ground) and the stripped ends of the cables are connected to the terminal block of the M-Lead Splitter

Box (Red to pin 1, Black to pin 2), see Figure 19-5.

A maximum of 10 boxes may be powered by one cable by daisy-chaining the rest of the power inputs.

Refer to System Configuration diagrams or

Figure 19-6 for the usage of the M-Lead I/Os.

18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

N

C

N

C

M

B

6

O

U

T

M

A

6

O

U

T

M

B

5

O

U

T

M

A

5

O

U

T

M

B

4

O

U

T

M

A

4

O

U

T

M

B

3

O

U

T

M

A

3

O

U

T

M

B

2

O

U

T

M

A

2

O

U

T

M

B

1

O

U

T

M

A

1

O

U

T

M

B

I

N

M

A

I

N

G

R

O

U

N

D

+

1

2

V

Figure 19-5 M-LEAD SPLITTER BOX I/Os

19-5


WAM/SWITCH 1

TXS+ (MA2)

TXS- (MB2)

MA

MB

EA

EB

M-LEAD

SPLITTER BOX

MA IN MA/OUT

MB IN MB/OUT

MA2/OUT

MB2/OUT

LOCATION 1 (CENTRAL)

M-LEAD

SPLITTER BOX

MA/OUT

MB/OUT

MA2/OUT MA IN

MB2/OUT MB IN

LINK

EQUIPMENT

EA

EB

M-LEAD

SPLITTER BOX

MA/OUT

MB/OUT

MA2/OUT MA IN

MB2/OUT MB IN

MA

MB

LINK

EQUIPMENT

EA

EB

MA

MB

LINK

EQUIPMENT

EA

EB

WAM/SWITCH 2

TXS+ (MA2)

TXS- (MB2)

MA

MB

MA

MB

EA

EB

LOCATION 2

LINK

EQUIPMENT

EA

EB

WAM/SWITCH 3

TXS+ (MA2)

TXS- (MB2)

MA

MB

LOCATION 3

MA

MB

EA

EB

Figure 19-6 WAM E&M LEAD CABLE LAYOUT 3 LOCATIONS

19.6 WAM AUDIO CONNECTIONS

The audio of the WAMs are cross coupled to the other WAMs and back to themselves if circuitry permits. Connections to external circuits may require summing and distribution amps, depending upon the external interface.

When all Switches are co-located approximately

6 to 8 WAMs may be connected as shown in Figure

19-7.

A single WAM connected to a single external

interface is shown in Figure 19-8. This may be accom-

plished by direct wiring. Care must be taken on alignment and loading of the external interface not to exceed line build out parameters or line levels. If this cannot be prevented then an external summation and distribution amplifier is required to avoid audio issues

(see Figure 19-9).

WAM 1

TXA+

TXA-

RXA+

RXA-

WAM 2

TXA+

TXA-

RXA+

RXA-

WAM ...

TXA+

TXA-

RXA+

RXA-

WAM 8

TXA+

TXA-

RXA+

RXA-

Figure 19-7 WAM AUDIO CABLE LAYOUT

ONE LOCATION

REMOTE LOCATION

WAM MW

TXA+

TXA-

RXA+

RXA-

TXA+

TXA-

RXA+

RXA-

HOST LOCATION

MW WAM

TXA+

TXA-

RXA+

RXA-

TXA+

TXA-

RXA+

RXA-

Figure 19-8 WAM AUDIO CABLE LAYOUT

TWO LOCATIONS

19-6


REMOTE LOCATION

WAM

TXA+

TXA-

RXA+

RXA-

MW

TXA+

TXA-

RXA+

RXA-

HOST LOCATION - OPTIONAL CONNECTION

MW

TXA+

TXA-

SUMMATION WAM

TXA+

TXA-

RXA+

RXA-

D

RXA+

RXA-

DIST. AMP

Figure 19-9 AUDIO CABLE LAYOUT TWO LOCATIONS WITH EXTERNAL AUDIO DEVICE

A Location where at least two external interfaces are used for connection from the Host Location to the

Remote Locations (as in Figure 19-5) is shown in

Figure 19-10. If more than two external interfaces are

required then the summation and distribution amps must have the appropriate number of inputs and outputs. The summation and/or distribution amplifiers may be ganged together if needed.

WAM

TXA+

TXA-

RXA+

RXA-

MW

TXA+

TXA-

RXA+

RXA-

D

SUMMATION

DIST. AMP

MW

TXA+

TXA-

RXA+

RXA-

Figure 19-10 AUDIO CABLE LAYOUT HOST LOCATION OF A 3 LOCATION CONFIGURATION

19-7



19-8

MULTI-NET CONSOLE MODULE (MCM)

SECTION 20 MULTI-NET CONSOLE MODULE (MCM)


Refer to 3000 Series Switch Service Information manual, Part No. 001-3139-102, for the component layout, parts list and schematic. Refer to Figure 8-1 for the Basic Board block diagram. The Multi-Net

Console Module (MCM) interfaces to a VRCM-50 series dispatch console.

The MCM has a digital data connection that requires a separate full duplex 9600 baud RS-232 interface called the Intelligent Dispatch Interface Bus

(IDIB). The separate data path is required to allow the computer controlled dispatch console(s) to monitor and display the status of other groups. This status and display update can take place while the console is busy with voice communication on another group.

The information exchanged between the MCM and the console(s) controls what the MCM receives and transmits for voice communication.

The MCM connects the 4-wire, 600-ohm balanced audio with the Pulse Code Modulation

(PCM) data paths and communicates to other modules via the Intra-Terminal Data Bus (IDB). The MCM also monitors the Channel Status Bus (CSB) to send update changes to the console via the IDIB.

CALL

PROCESSOR

NETWORK

INTRA-TERMINAL

DATA BUS

(NetIDB)

NETWORK

CHANNEL

STATUS BUS

(NetCSB)

NetNIM

NETWORK

INTERFACE

MODULE

ETHERNET

BUS



(CIB)


(CIB)

LOGGING RECORDER

CHANNEL

INTERFACE

MODULE

CIMs

CONVENTIONAL

CHANNEL

MODULE

CCMs

WIDE

AREA

MODULE

WAMs

LOGGING

ENCODER

MODULE

LEMs

PSTN OR PABX

TELEPHONE

INTERFACE

MODULE

TIMs

SYSTEM

NETWORK

MODULE

SNMs

DISPATCH

CHANNEL

MODULE

DCMs




20-1


20.2 MCM SETUP PROCEDURE



Diagram.



Consoles takes place on a digital RS-232 link at 9600 baud. The digital link occurs on the Secondary lines.

Table 20-1 MCM SWITCH SETTINGS

Switch

S1

S3

S4

S5

-

-

1

1

Open Sections

-

-

2

2

3

-

-

-

4

-

4

-

1

1

-

-

Close Sections

2

2

-

-

-

3

3

3

-

4

-

4

20.2.3 MCM BACKPLANE EXTERNAL CON-

TACTS

See the Backplane Section 23 for pinouts on the shelf backplane and wire harness pinouts.


Backplane


Description

Sec Rx +

Sec Rx -

EA lead

EB lead

Pri Rx Audio+


Sec Tx +

Sec Tx -

MA lead

MB lead

Pri Tx Audio+


Wire Harness

J1,3,5,7

Signal

Ground

RX+

RX-

J2,4,6,8

Signal

Ground

Unsel Tx+

Unsel Tx-

Select Tx+

Select Txpin 1 pin 2 pin 3 pin 4 pin 5 pin 6

20.2.2 MCM JUMPER PLACEMENT

Table 20-2 MCM JUMPER PLACEMENT


J24 1 to 2*

2 to 3

J27 1 to 2

2 to 3*

P33 1 to 2*

3 to 4*

5

6

J36 1 only*

1 to 2

2 to 3



Not used

Normal audio



Not used



J14

J15

J21

J22



20.3 MCM ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATION


The MCM is pre-aligned with the Basic Board

Module alignment procedures, refer to Section 8.3.

1. Main Rx Audio Level From J1.

a. Setup for alignment, input 1004 Hz tone at

-12 dBm into J1 EQU.

b. Set S5 for Test 1 (open section 1, close 2, 3 and 4).


d. Adjust R41 to -6 dBm ± 0.5 dB at J11.

e. Verify that the level at TP5 is -6 dBm

± 1 dB.

6. Main Tx Audio Output Level From J1.


b. Adjust R83 for a -3 dBm ± 0.5 dB level at TP3.

c. Adjust R44 for a -12 dBm ± 0.5 dB level at J12.

20-2


4. Normal Operation a. Set S5 to 0, normal operation (close sections 1, 2,

3, and 4).

b. Reset the module, press S2 and release.


NOTE: FSK is not aligned since it is not used on the

MCM.

Proceed To Talk Tone Level (Orbicom Consoles)

When using the Multi-Net Console Module with an Orbicom Console, perform the following alignment.

1. Set S5 to Test 1 (open section 1, close sections 2, 3, and 4).

2. Adjust R83 for -3 dBm ±0.5 dB level at TP3.

3. Set S5 to 0, normal operation (close sections 1, 2, 3, and 4).


•

•

20.4 ALIGNMENT

Connections to the MCM may take several forms:

Direct Connection.

Leased Lines.

•

Microwave Link.

•

T1 Channel Bank Interfaces.


Main Transmit





Step 1 at J12.



Example: Microwave has -16 dBm maximum input, set J12 for -28 dBm.

Main Receive


2. Set S5 to Test 1 (open section 1, close sections 2, 3, and 4)


4. Insert the maximum level determined in Step 1 using a 600-ohm audio oscillator into EQU port of







Not aligned since the MCM does not use FSK signaling.

20-3


20.5 PCM SUMMATION PERSONALITY CARD

The PCM Summation Personality Card sums multiple time slots on the PCM audio bus for the unselect audio for the VRCM-50 Series of consoles (see

Figure 20-3).


1. Plug the summation card into J32.

2. Plug the summation card into the piggyback bus via

J31.

3. Connect wire harness A3 on the Main Card to the summation card:

Rx PCM Primary U26, pin 13 to J4, pin 1

Master Clock U26, pin 9 to J4, pin 2

Master Sync U26, pin 7 to J4, pin 3

4. Connect wire harness A2 on the Main Card to the

Summation Card:

M-lead relay K1, pin 1 to UNSEL+ J3, pin 1

M-lead relay K1, pin 4 to UNSEL- J3, pin 2



The Summed Unselect Audio Output is on the

MA and MB external connections.

The Summed Select Audio Output is on the

Primary Tx+ and Tx- connections.


1. Set CIM S5 to Test 9

(open section 1-4, close 2-3).

2. Unselect audio adjust: a. Set MCM S5 to Test 9 (open section 1-4, close 2-3).

b. Press S2 on the MCM and release.

c. Adjust R36 for 4.0V P-P

±

0.25V at TP1 on the summation card using an oscilloscope.

(Alternate method: Use the transmission test set and adjust R36 for -22.0 dBm

±

1 dB).

d. Adjust R37 for -3 dBm at TP2 on the PCM summation Card.

3. Select Audio adjust: a. Set MCM S5 to Test 10 (open section 2-4;

close 1-3).

b. Press S2 on the MCM and release.

c. Adjust R38 for 4.0V P-P

±

0.25V at TP3 on the summation card using an oscilloscope.

(Alternate method: Use the transmission test set and adjust R38 for -23.0 dBm

±

1 dB).

d. Adjust R39 for -3 dBm at TP4 on the PCM

Summation Card.

4. Set S5 on CIM and MCM (all sections closed).

5. Reset each module, press S2 and release.

20-4

4

3

2

1

ON



20-5


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Figure 20-3 SUMMATION BOARD (-760) ALIGNMENT POINTS DIAGRAM

20-6

CONVENTIONAL PATCH MODULE (CPM)

SECTION 21 CONVENTIONAL PATCH MODULE (CPM)


Refer to 3000 Series Switch Service Information manual, Part No. 001-3139-102, for the component layout, parts list and schematic. Refer to Figure 8-1 for the Basic Board Block diagram.

The Conventional Patch Module (CPM) is used to dynamically patch a single conventional channel to a single trunked group. The Switch can hold two

CPMs per MCM. The CPMs must be adjacent to the controlling MCM (e.g. the MCM is at Slot 8005 so the

CPMs must be placed in Slots 8006 and 8007). No other cards may be placed in these slots. If the user wishes to patch a conventional channel to more than one trunk group the following procedure must be used.

21.2 PCM SETUP PROCEDURE



diagram.



Consoles may takes place by direct contact with E&M input and output.

Table 21-1 CPM SWITCH SETTINGS


S1

S3

S4

S5

1

-

1

1

2

-

2

2

3

-

-

3

4

-

4

4

-

1

-

-

Close Sections

-

2

-

-

-

3

3

-

-

4

-

-

1. A trunk group is chosen for the CPM patch, (e.g.

Site 1, Home 1, Group 1 (S1H1G1) and the conventional channel is chosen or vice versa.

2. The trunk group chosen for the CPM patch

(S1H1G1) must be placed in a group patch with the other trunk groups for the patch in a Wide Area

Module (WAM) patch.

A CPM with direct connection is associated with only one group code and uses a form of Type II E&M lead input similar to the mobile PTT.

The CPM connect the 4-Wire 600 ohm balanced audio with the Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) data paths and communicates to other modules via the

Intra-Terminal Data Bus (IDB). The CPM also monitors the Channel Interface Module (CIM) Channel

Status Bus (CSB) to determine if a CIM is active with a CPM group.

21.2.2 CPM JUMPER PLACEMENT

Table 21-2 CPM BOARD JUMPER

PLACEMENT


J24 1 to 2*

2 to 3

J27 1 to 2

2 to 3*

P33 1 to 2*

3 to 4*

5

6

J36 1 only*

1 to 2

2 to 3



Not Used

Normal Operation



Not used



J14

J15

J21

J22



21-1

Table 21-3 BACKPLANE PLACEMENT

Backplane


Description

Sec Rx +

Sec Rx -

EA lead

EB lead

Pri Rx Audio+


Sec Tx +

Sec Tx -

MA lead

MB lead

Pri Tx Audio+


Wire Harness

J1,3,5,7

Signal

Ground

RX+

RX-

J2,4,6,8

Signal

Ground

Tx+

Txpin 1 pin 2 pin 3 pin 4 pin 5 pin 6

21.2.3 E-LEAD SELECTION

If the PTT from the console is an open contact relay, either of the above options for J36 may be used.

If the PTT is a closure to ground with a pull-up resistor to a positive voltage, J36, pin 2 should be connected to ground without connection to pin 1 or pin 3.

21.2.4 CPM BACKPLANE EXTERNAL

CONTACTS

See the Backplane Section 23 for pinouts on the shelf backplane and wire harness pinouts.

21.3 CPM ALIGNMENT SPECIFICATION


The CPM is pre-aligned with the Basic Board

Module alignment procedures (Refer to Section 8.3).

21.3.2 ALIGNMENT

Connections to the CPM may take several forms:


2. Leased Lines

3. Microwave Link




Main Transmit





Step 1 at J12.




J12 for -28 dBm.

Main Receive











Not aligned since the CPM does not use FSK signaling.

21-2


4

3

2

1

ON

Figure 21-1 CPM ALIGNMENT POINTS DIAGRAM

21-3



21-4

SECTION 22 POWER SUPPLY

POWER SUPPLY

Figure 22-1 POWER SUPPLY


The Switch may be powered by different types of power e.g.:

•

110V AC Single Phase

•

230V AC Single Phase

A power supply may be removed and installed while power is applied to the Switch provided the

Switch is equipped with a Redundant Supply.

See Section 4 for a wiring diagram of the power

supplies.

22.2 POWER CONSUMPTION

The following tables shows the voltage, current and power for each supply voltage per card (based on loading of 72 cards).


Excluding the TIM-DID provides a total of 4.3W for normal modules. The following formulas are used to find the BTUs per hour.

The total wattage of the terminal is found by multiplying the wattage of a module by the number of modules.



Terminal Power

÷



3.6 x Wattage of Power Supply = BTU per hour

EXAMPLE:

4.3W x 72 = 310W

310W

÷

0.7 = 443W

3.6 x 443W = 1,595 Btu/Hr


POWER

Voltage Current

+5V DC

+12V DC

-12V DC

-48V DC

0.50A

0.10A

0.05A

0.03A*

Total

* DIDs only.

Power

2.50W

1.20W

0.60W

1.44W

5.74W

22-1

POWER SUPPLY

BUS BAR

ASSEMBLY

F

G

H

C

D

A

B

E

+5V SENSE (RED)

+12V SENSE (BLUE)

+12V (BLUE)

+12V RETURN (BLACK)

-48V RETURN (BLACK)

-48V (GREEN)

POWER FAIL/

OUTPUT GOOD RETURN

+5V/+12V RETURN

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6



A5

1

2


POWER FAIL (ORANGE)

10

11

6

8

3

4

5

TB3

B1

B2

B3

B4

B5

B6


25

A3

A

B

13

23

24

+5V/+12V RETURN

+5V/+12V RETURN

+5V

+5V

+5V

+12V

+12V


F

G

H

C

D

E

A2

AC IN (GND)

TB1

AC IN (LOAD)

A1

AC (NEUTRAL) A2

A3

A1

A4

AC IN (LOAD)

A5

AC (NEUTRAL) A6

B1

B2

B3

B4

B5

B6

A6

23

24

AC IN (GND)

BUS BAR

ASSEMBLY

F

G

D

E

H

A

B

C

25

+5V SENSE (RED)

+12V SENSE (BLUE)

+12V (BLUE)

+12V RETURN (BLACK)




POWER FAIL (ORANGE)

-48V RETURN (BLACK)

-48V (GREEN)

TB2

POWER FAIL/

OUTPUT GOOD RETURN

A4

A5

A6

A1

A2

A3

B4

B5

B6

B1

B2

B3



+5V/+12V RETURN

+5V/+12V RETURN

+5V/+12V RETURN

+5V

+5V

+5V

+12V

+12V

13

A4

A

B

F

G

H

C

D

E

1

2

3

4

5

6

8

10

11


POSITION "A"


POSITION "B"

REDUNDANT POWER SUPPLY

Figure 22-2 6-8 SHELF POWER SUPPLY INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM

22-2

A

F

B

D

C

E

G

FRONT VIEW

H

Figure 22-3 A3-A4 CONNECTOR

POWER SUPPLY

25 24 23 22 21 20

19 18 17 16

15 14 13 12

11 10 9 8 7

6 5 4 3 2 1

FRONT VIEW

Figure 22-4 A5-A6 CONNECTOR

Figure 22-5 POWER SUPPLY TERMINAL BLOCKS

22-3

Figure 22-6 POWER SUPPLY DRAWER

22-4

POWER SUPPLY

POWER SUPPLY

BACKPLANE P33

SHELF 2

-48V

-12V

+5V

+5V

GND

GND

GND

GND

+5V

+12V

+12V

GND

9

12

15

3

6

11

14

7

10

13

1

4


AC IN (LOAD)

AC IN (GND)

AC (NEUTRAL)

P1

10

4

1

12

9

6

3

2

7

11

8

5

POWER SUPPLY POSITION "B"

OUTPUT 1

BACKPLANE P33

SHELF 1

10

13

11

14

3

6

9

12

15

1

4

7

-48V

-12V

+5V

+5V

+5V

+12V

+12V

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND


AC IN (LOAD)

AC IN (GND)

AC (NEUTRAL)

P1

10

4

1

12

9

6

3

2

7

11

8

5

POWER SUPPLY POSITION "A"

OUTPUT 2

Figure 22-7 2-4 SHELF POWER SUPPLY INTERCONNECT

22-5

Figure 22-8 2-4 SHELF POWER SUPPLY (FRONT VIEW)

Figure 22-9 2-4 SHELF POWER SUPPLY (REAR VIEW)

3 2 1

6 5 4

9 8 7

12 11 10

P1

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

10 11 12

13 14 15

J1

22-6

POWER SUPPLY

BACKPLANE

SECTION 23 BACKPLANE


The 3000 Series Switch shelf backplane contains slots that modules are inserted into, to derive the module address. The backplane distributes:

•

Power

•

PCM paths

•

Master clock

•

Master sync

•

Intra-Terminal data bus

•

Channel status bus

•

Control lines for data busses

The backplane has active circuitry that distributes

PCM paths, master clock and master sync. The backplanes are connected together for complete distribution of receive and transmit signals to all shelves within the Switch.

23.2 BACKPLANE SETUP PROCEDURE

23.2.1 SHELF ADDRESS SETTINGS

Using the following table, determine the settings of Switch 1 for the Shelf Address of each shelf.

Table 23-1 SHELF ADDRESS SETTINGS

Shelf Number

13

14

15

16

9

10

11

12

17

18

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2


ALL Closed

1

2

1,2

3

1,3

2,3

1,2,3

4

1,4

2,4

1,2,4

3,4

1,3,4

2,3,4

1,2,3,4

5

1,5

23.2.2 TERMINATION SETTINGS

Using the following table, determine the switch settings for switches 2 through 8. All switches are

37.5 ohms and normally set for 6 shelves.

•

S2 - VTM PCM

•

S3 - Primary Tx PCM

•

S4 - Primary Rx PCM

•

S5 - Master Sync

•

S6 - Master Clock

•

S7 - Secondary Rx PCM

•

S8 - Secondary Tx PCM

14

15

16

17

18

10

11

12

13

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

Table 23-2 TERMINATION SETTINGS

Number of Shelves

Switch Sections

CLOSED

ALL

1,3,6,7,8

1

2,4,5,6,7,8

2,5,6,7,8

2,7

3,4,5,6,8

3,4,6,7

3,4,8

3,5,6

3,5

3,6,8

3,7

3

4,5,6,7,8

4,5,6,7

4,5,6

23.2.3 JUMPER DEFINITIONS AND SETTINGS

1. External Cable Connections

•

J1/J2 - Shelf Interconnect

2. Primary Audio Connections

•

J3/J5 - Primary Rx PCM

•

J2/J4 - Primary Tx PCM

3. Secondary Audio Connections

•

J23/J25 - Secondary Rx PCM

•

J24/J26 - Secondary Tx PCM

23-1

BACKPLANE

23.3 STANDARD SHELF I/O CONNECTIONS

Refer to the card (CIM or DIM) installed in the standard shelf for further jumper settings. The normal jumper connection is shown in parenthesis.

1. J7 (pin 2 to pin 3)

•

Pin 1 - Output

•

Pin 2 - VTM

•

Pin 3 - Input


•

Pin 1 - Output

•

Pin 2 - VTM PCM (destination)

•

Pin 3 - Input

3. J9-J10

•

J9, pin 3 to J10, pin 3

•


4. J11 (pin 2 to pin 3)

•

Pin 1 - Output

•

Pin 2 - Master Sync Shelf (destination)

•

Pin 3 - Input

5. J12 (pin 2 to pin 3)

•

Pin 1 - Output

•

Pin 2 - Master Sync connector

•

Pin 3 - Input

6. J13 (pin 2 to pin 3)

•

Pin 1 - Output

•

Pin 2 - Master Clock Shelf (destination)

•

Pin 3 - Input

7. J14 (pin 2 to pin 3)

•

Pin 1 - Output

•

Pin 2 - Master Clock

•

Pin 3 - Input

8. J15-J16

•


9. J17-J18

•


•


See Figure 23-2 for switch settings.

S7 SEC RX PCM S8 SEC TX PCM

ON

1

ON

1

2

3

2

3

6

7

4

5

8

6

7

4

5

8

1

J17

SEC PCM

J18

1

J15

1

J16

1

S6 MASTER CLOCK

ON

1

2

3

6

7

8

4

5

S5 MASTER SYNC

ON

1

2

3

6

7

4

5

8

S2 VTM PCM

ON

1

2

3

6

7

8

4

5

J9

PRI Tx/Rx PCM

1

J10

1

MASTER SYNC

J12

1

J11

1

1

VTM

J7

1

J8

MASTER CLOCK

J13

1

J14

1

S3 PRI TX PCM

ON

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

S4 PRI RX PCM

ON

1

2

3

6

7

8

4

5

SWITCH SETTINGS ARE FOR A 6-SHELF SYSTEM

Figure 23-1 STANDARD SHELF BACKPLANE SWITCH AND JUMPER SETTINGS

23-2

BACKPLANE

23.4 CIM SHELF I/O CONNECTIONS

23.4.1 PRIMARY PCM

The normal jumper connection is shown in parenthesis.

1. J9 (pin 1 to J10, pin 1/pin 2 to J10, pin 2)

•

Pin 1 - Input

•

Pin 2 - Output

•

Pin 3 - Input

•

Pin 4 - Output


•

Pin 1 - Primary Tx PCM

•

Pin 2 - Primary Rx PCM

•


•


3. J15 (pin 2 to J16, pin 2)

•

Pin 1 - Input

•

Pin 2 - Input

•

Pin 3 - Input

4. J16 (pin 2 to J15, pin 2)

•

Pin 1 - Output

•

Pin 2 - Input

•

Pin 3 - Output

23.4.2 SECONDARY PCM

The normal jumper connection is shown in parenthesis.


•

Pin 1 - Output

•

Pin 2 - Input

•

Pin 3 - Input

•

Pin 4 - Output


•

Pin 1 - Output

•

Pin 2 - Input

•

Pin 3 - Input

•

Pin 4 - Output

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

Figure 23-2 S2 - S8 SWITCH SETTINGS

S7 SEC RX PCM

ON

1

2

S8 SEC TX PCM

ON

1

2

5

6

7

8

3

4

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

J17

SEC PCM

1

J18

J15

1

J16

1

S6 MASTER CLOCK

ON

1

2

3

6

7

8

4

5

S5 MASTER SYNC

ON

1

2

5

6

7

8

3

4

J12

MASTER SYNC

1

J11

1

S2 VTM PCM

ON

1

2

3

6

7

8

4

5

J9

PRI Tx/Rx PCM

1

J10

1

1

VTM

J7

1

J8

MASTER CLOCK

J13

1

J14

1

S3 PRI TX PCM

ON

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

S4 PRI RX PCM

ON

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8


Figure 23-3 CIM/CCM SHELF BACKPLANE SWITCH AND JUMPER SETTINGS

23-3

23.5 NetNIM SHELF WITH CIM/CCMs

The following refer to the PCM Receiver/Transmitter. The normal jumper connection is shown in parenthesis. Refer to the card (CIM or DIM) installed in the NetNIM shelf for further jumper settings.


• Pin 1 - Output

•

Pin 2 - VTM

• Pin 3 - Input


•

Pin 1 - Output

• Pin 2 - VTM PCM (source)

•

Pin 3 - Input


• Pin 1 - Input

•

Pin 2 - Output

• Pin 3 - Input

•

Pin 4 - Output


• Pin 1 - Primary Tx PCM

•


• Pin 3 - Primary Rx PCM

•


5. J11 (pin 1 to pin 2)

•

Pin 1 - Output

• Pin 2 - Master Sync Shelf (source)

•

Pin 3 - Input

6. J12 (pin 1 to pin 2)

• Pin 1 - Output

•


• Pin 3 - Input

7. J13 (pin 1 to pin 2)

•

Pin 1 - Output

• Pin 2 - Master Clock Shelf (source)

•

Pin 3 - Input

8. J14 (pin 1 to pin 2)

• Pin 1 - Output

•


• Pin 3 - Input

9. J15-J16

•


10.J17-J18

• J17, pin 1 to J18, pin 1

•



BACKPLANE

S7 SEC RX PCM

ON

1

S8 SEC TX PCM

ON

1

2

3

2

3

6

7

8

4

5

6

7

8

4

5

1

J17

SEC PCM

1

J18

J15

1

J16

1

S6 MASTER CLOCK

ON

1

2

3

6

7

4

5

8

S5 MASTER SYNC

ON

1

2

3

6

7

8

4

5

S2 VTM PCM

ON

1

2

3

6

7

4

5

8

S3 PRI TX PCM

ON

1

2

3

6

7

8

4

5

MASTER SYNC

J12

1

J11

1

MASTER CLOCK

J13

1

1

J14

J9

J10

1

1

1

Tx/Rx PCM

J7

1

J8

VTM PCM

S4 PRI RX PCM

ON

1

2

3

6

7

4

5

8


Figure 23-4 NetNIM SHELF WITH CIM/CCMs SWITCH AND JUMPER SETTINGS

23-4

BACKPLANE

23.6 NetNIM SHELF WITHOUT CIM/CCMs

The following refer to the PCM Receiver/Transmitter. The normal jumper connection is shown in parenthesis. Refer to the card (CIM or DIM) installed in the NetNIM shelf for further jumper settings.


•

Pin 1 - Output

•

Pin 2 - VTM

•

Pin 3 - Input


•

Pin 1 - Output

•

Pin 2 - VTM PCM (source)

•

Pin 3 - Input


•

Pin 1 - Input

•

Pin 2 - Output

•

Pin 3 - Input

•

Pin 4 - Output


•


•


•


•


S7 SEC RX PCM S8 SEC TX PCM

ON

1

2

ON

1

2

3 3

4

5

6

7

8

6

7

8

4

5

J17

SEC PCM

1

1

J18

J15

1

J16

1

S6 MASTER CLOCK

ON

1

2

3

6

7

8

4

5

5. J11 (pin 1 to pin 2)

•

Pin 1 - Output

•

Pin 2 - Master Sync Shelf (source)

•

Pin 3 - Input

6. J12 (pin 1 to pin 2)

•

Pin 1 - Output

•


•

Pin 3 - Input

7. J13 (pin 1 to pin 2)

•

Pin 1 - Output

•

Pin 2 - Master Clock Shelf (source)

•

Pin 3 - Input

8. J14 (pin 1 to pin 2)

•

Pin 1 - Output

•


•

Pin 3 - Input

9. J15-J16

•


10.J17-J18

•


•



S5 MASTER SYNC

ON

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

S2 VTM PCM

ON

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

S3 PRI TX PCM

ON

1

2

3

6

7

8

4

5

MASTER SYNC

J12

1

J11

1

MASTER CLOCK

J13

1

1

J14

J9

J10

1

J7

1

J8

VTM PCM

1

1

Tx/Rx PCM

S4 PRI RX PCM

ON

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8


Figure 23-5 NetNIM SHELF WITHOUT CIM/CCMs SWITCH AND JUMPER SETTINGS

23-5

P

T

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

C

M

C

C

M

D

C

M

D

C

M

L

E

M

L

E

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

P

T

M

SHELF 2

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

N e t

N

N e t

N

V

T

M

V

T

M

1 2

S

N

M

S

N

M

T

I

M

T

I

M

T

I

M

T

I

M

D

I

M

I

M

I

M

SHELF 1

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

D

I

M

POWER SUPPLY


P

T

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

P

T

M

D

C

M

SHELF 4

48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59

D

C

M

L

E

M

L

E

M

P

T

M

SHELF 3

32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

C

M

C

C

M

P

T

M

SHELF 2

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

N e t

N

N e t

N

V

T

M

1

V

T

M

2

S

N

M

S

N

M

T

I

M

T

I

M

T

I

M

T

I

M

D

I

M

I

M

I

M

SHELF 1

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

D

I

M

"A" POWER SUPPLY "B"


23-6

BACKPLANE

P

T

M

P

T

M

SHELF 6

80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91

SHELF 5

64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75

P

T

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

P

T

M

SHELF 4

48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59

D

C

M

D

C

M

L

E

M

L

E

M

SHELF 3

32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

P

T

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

C

M

C

C

M

P

T

M

SHELF 2

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

N e t

N

N e t

N

V

T

M

1

V

T

M

2

S

N

M

S

N

M

T

I

M

T

I

M

T

I

M

T

I

M

D

I

M

D

I

M

I I

M

SHELF 1

M

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11


Figure 23-8 6-SHELF SWITCH RACK LAYOUT

23-7

BACKPLANE

P

T

M

P

T

M

SHELF 8

112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123

SHELF 7

96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107

P

T

M

SHELF 6

80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91

P

T

M

P

T

M

SHELF 5

64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75

W

A

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

W

A

M

SHELF 4

48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59

P

T

M

D

C

M

D

C

M

L

E

M

L

E

M

P

T

M

SHELF 3

32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

I

M

C

C

M

C

C

M

P

T

M

SHELF 2

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

N e t

N

N e t

N

V

T

M

1

V

T

M

2

S

N

M

S

N

M

T

I

M

T

I

M

T

I

M

T

I

M

D

I

M

I

M

I

M

SHELF 1

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

D

I

M


Figure 23-9 8-SHELF SWITCH RACK SETUP

23-8

BACKPLANE

SHELF 2

J5

J3

J6 J23

J4 J25

J24

J2 J1

J26 P33

J22

SHELF 1

NIM SHELF

J22

J5

J3

J6

J4

J23

J21

J24

J25 J26

J2 J1

J20

J21 J20

POWER SUPPLY

P33

Figure 23-10 2-SHELF SWITCH BACKPLANE CABLES

BACKPLANE

SHELF 4

J5

J3

J6 J23

J4 J25

J24

J26

J2 J1

P33

J22

SHELF 3

J5

J3

J6

J4

J21

J23 J24

J25 J26

J2 J1

J20

P33

J22

SHELF 2

J5

J3

J6

J4

J23

J21

J24

J2 J1

J25 J26

J20

P33

J22

SHELF 1

NIM SHELF

J22

J5

J3

J6

J4

J23

J21

J24

J25 J26

J2 J1

J20

J21 J20

POWER SUPPLY

P33


23-9

A7

023-3039-842

J5

J3

J5

J3

J6

J4

J23

J25

J24

J26

J1 J2

J1

A6

023-3039-841

SHELF 6

J2

P33

J6

J4

J23

J25

J24

J26 P33

A4

STANDARD SHELF

SHELF 5

597-3003-295

023-3039-870

J5

J3

J6 J23

J4 J25

J24

J26

J1 J2

P33

J5

J3

J6

J4

J23 J24

J25 J26

J1 J2

SHELF 4

P33

SHELF 3

597-3003-295

023-3039-870

J5

J3

J6

J4

J23

J25

J24

J26

J1 J2

P33

NIM SHELF

SHELF 2

J5

J3

J6

J4

J23 J24

J25 J26

J1 J2

P33

SHELF 1

P4 P3

P2

P1

"A"

POWER SUPPLY

"B"


23-10

BACKPLANE

SHELF 8

A7

023-3039-842

J5

J3

J22

SHELF 7

J5

J3

A4

STANDARD SHELF

J6

J4

J23

J25

J21

J6

J4

J23

J25

J24

J26

J24

J26

J2 J1

J2 J1

A6

023-3039-841

J20

P33

P33

J22

SHELF 6

J5

J3

J6

J4

J23

J21

J24

J2 J1

J25 J26

J20

P33

J22

SHELF 5

J5

J3

J6 J23

J4 J25

J21

J24

J26

J2 J1

J20

J22

SHELF 4

J5

J3

J21

J6

J4

J23 J24

J25 J26

J2 J1

J20

P33

P33

J22

SHELF 3

023-3039-842

J22

SHELF 2

J5

J3

J5

J3

J6

J4

J23

J21

J24

J2 J1

J25 J26

J20

P33

023-3039-841

J20

J6

J4

J23

J25

J21

J24

J26

J2 J1

P33

J22

SHELF 1

NIM SHELF

J22

J5

J3

J6

J4

J23

J21

J24

J25 J26

J2 J1

J20

J21 J20

"A"

POWER SUPPLY

"B"

P33


BACKPLANE

23-11

BACKPLANE

J5

J3

J6

J4

J23

J25

J24

J26

J2 J1

P9 P8 P7 P6

P5 P4 P3 P2

P1

P11

P10

P33

P12

S1

J22 J21 J20

Figure 23-14 BASIC BOARD BACKPLANE WIRING LAYOUT

J5

J3

J6

J4

J23

J25

J24

J26

J2 J1

J103 J102 J101 J100

S1

P33

J22 J21 J20

Figure 23-15 NetNIM SHELF BACKPLANE WIRING LAYOUT

23-12

BACKPLANE

25

50

24

49

23

48

22

47

21

46

20

45

19

44

18

43

17

42

16

41

15

40

14

39

13

38

12

37

11

36

10

35

9

34

8

33

7

32

6

31

5

30

4

29

3

28

2

27

1

26

NOT USED PIN NUMBERS

19

45

20

46

21

17

43

18

44

41

16

40

15

42

38

13

39

14

49

24

50

25

47

22

48

23

35

10

34

9

32

7

33

8

36

11

37

12

30

5

31

6

29

4

28

3

26

1

27

2

1 (RING) AND (TIP) DENOTE TELEPHONE LINE CONNECTIONS TO THE TIM.

2 AUDIO OUTPUT FROM THE CIM SUMMATION BOARDS FOR THE RECORDING

SYSTEM ARE THE MA AND MB CONNECITONS.

RXS+ (GRN/BLK)

TXS- (BLK/BRN)

TXS+ (BRN/BLK)

EB (BLK/SLT)

EA (SLT/BLK)

MB (YEL/BLU)

2

MA (BLU/YEL)

RXA- (RING) (YEL/ORN)

1

RXA+ (TIP) (ORN/YEL)

TXA- (YEL/GRN)

TXA+ (GRN/YEL)

RXS- (YEL/BRN)

RXS+ (BRN/YEL)

TXS- (YEL/SLT)

TXS+ (SLT/YEL)

EB (VIO/BLU)

EA (BLU/VIO)

MB (VIO/ORN)

MA (ORN/VIO)

2

RXA- (RING) (VIO/GRN)

1

RXA+ (TIP) (GRN/VIO)

TXA- (VIO/BRN)

TXA+ (BRN/VIO)

NC (VIO/SLT)

NC (SLT/VIO)

RXS- (WHT/BLU)

RXS+ (BLU/WHT)

TXS- (WHT/ORN)

TXS+ (ORN/WHT)

EB (WHT/GRN)

EA (GRN/WHT)

MB (WHT/BRN)

MA (BRN/WHT)

2

RXA- (RING) (WHT/SLT)

1

RXA+ (TIP) (SLT/WHT)

TXA- (RED/BLU)

TXA+ (BLU/RED)

RXS- (RED/ORN)

RXS+ (ORN/RED)

TXS- (RED/GRN)

TXS+ (GRN/RED)

EB (RED/BRN)

EA (BRN/RED)

MB (RED/SLT)

2

MA (SLT/RED)

RXA- (RING) (BLK/BLU)

1

RXA+ (TIP) (BLU/BLK)

TXA- (BLK/ORN)

TXA+ (ORN/BLK)

RXS- (BLK/GRN)

Figure 23-16 TELEPHONE TERMINAL BLOCK LAYOUT

23-13

BACKPLANE

P37 P36 P35 P34

NC

TXS-

RXS+

MB

EA

TXA-

RXA+

TXS-

RXS+

MB

EA

TXA-

RXA+

TXS-

RXS+

MB

EA

TXA-

RXA+

TXS-

RXS+

MB

EA

TXA-

RXA+

25

50

24

49

23

48

22

47

21

46

20

45

19

44

18

43

17

42

16

41

15

40

14

39

13

38

12

37

11

36

10

35

9

34

8

33

7

32

6

31

5

30

4

29

3

28

2

27

1

26

NC

TXS+

RXS-

MA

EB

TXA+

RXA-

TXS+

RXS-

MA

EB

TXA+

RXA-

TXS+

RXS-

MA

EB

TXA+

RXA-

TXS+

RXS-

MA

EB

TXA+

RXA-

J20 - P34/P35/P36/P37

P41/P45 P40/P44

P39/P43

P38/P42

NC

TXS-

RXS+

MB

EA

TXA-

RXA+

TXS-

RXS+

MB

EA

TXA-

RXA+

TXS-

RXS+

MB

EA

TXA-

RXA+

TXS-

RXS+

MB

EA

TXA-

RXA+

25

50

24

49

23

48

22

47

21

46

20

45

19

44

18

43

17

42

16

41

15

40

14

39

13

38

12

37

11

36

10

35

9

34

8

33

7

32

6

31

5

30

4

29

3

28

2

27

1

26

NC

TXS+

RXS-

MA

EB

TXA+

RXA-

TXS+

RXS-

MA

EB

TXA+

RXA-

TXS+

RXS-

MA

EB

TXA+

RXA-

TXS+

RXS-

MA

EB

TXA+

RXA-

J21 - P38/P39/P40/P41

J22 - P42/P43/P44/P45

Figure 23-17 BACKPLANE I/O JACKS

23-14

SECTION 24 INTERCOM

INTERCOM


The intercom functions as an interface between the Switch and remote base station to aid in alignment of the system. The intercom allows technicians to communicate between the Switch and remote base station over one line pair while aligning a second pair.

Then the lines are switched to align the first pair.

24.2 INSTALLATION


1. Audio Oscillator, 600 ohm output

2. AC Voltmeter, HP400E or equivalent

24.2.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1. Insert the Switch Intercom in an open slot in a card rack. Shelf-1, Slot-3 is preferred.

2. Insert a 1 kHz tone at 0 dBm into the Rx portion of

J702.

3. Verify 0 dBm

±

1 dB at U701, pin 7.

4. Insert the speaker/microphone in jacks J701 and

J702.

5. Adjust R704 for maximum level out. (8V P-P across speaker jack J701).

6. Remove the tone.

7. Speak into the microphone in a normal voice and adjust R712 for -12 dBm

±

3 dB at U703, pin 1.

8. Use the patch cord cables supplied in the installation kit to patch from the Intercom RX to RX jacks to the transmit and receive jacks on the selected module (CIM). (Refer to VTM component layout.)

9. Adjust the volume knob on the front panel to the desired listening level.

NOTE: J703 can be jumpered on pins 1 and 2 to provide a 600 ohm load to the receiving line. The jumper may be placed on one pin only to provide a high impedance bridging input (refer to the component layout).

24-1


24-2

INTERCOM

ERROR MESSAGES

APPENDIX A ERROR MESSAGES

A.1 IDB ERROR MESSAGES TO MESSAGE ACCOUNTING BUS FROM MODULES

MESSAGE

RPTASGNERR

LNKSTUPTO

RPTRESTRT

ERONRM

DRONRM

RECWMSG

TXCRNRM

NOCHACK

NTCAM

NTHAM

NTCLAM

NRXUPD

EXTERR

GRPNUMERR

IDLE BUSY

TXTIMOUT

HANGERR

NRAAM

NOTRUNK 19

SNMCONNERR 20

LEMNRO 21

REMNRO

RDMNRO

ELDLOST

22

23

24

NOSMMRESP

NOMODRESP

NOTRNKRO

NODISCRSP

NODIMRESP

NOSNBRESP

NOSERV

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

NODTONE

NOWINK

32

33

NOTRUNK2WY 34

REG LOSE 35

RIMLNKLOST

CRVMSTAT

CIMSTANDY

SNMLINKUP

36

37

38

39

NOIDIBRESP

IDIBACTIVE

IDBLOCK

CSBLOCK

NIMLOCK

40

41

72

73

74

13

14

15

16

17

18

7

8

9

10

11

12

CODE

1

4

5

6

2

3

DESCRIPTION

Repeater Assignment Error from Repeater Interface Module

Link Setup Time-out on Channel Interface Bus

Repeater Restarted Unexpected from Repeater Interface Module

Enable Repeater Order No Response Message

Disable Repeater Order No Response Message

Received Wrong Message from the Repeater Interface Module

Xmit Call Req. No Resp. from the Repeater Interface Module

No Channel Acknowledge from the Repeater Interface Module

No Transmit Call Acknowledge from the Repeater Interface Module

No Transmit Hang Acknowledge from the Repeater Interface Module

No Transmit Clear Acknowledge from the Repeater Interface Module

No Receive Update from the Repeater Interface Module

External Error

Group Number Error

Idle Busy Conflict

Transmit Time-out Error

Hang Error

No Repeater Authorization Acknowledge Message

Telephone Interface Module No Trunk Error

System Network Module Connection Failure

Link Established Message - No Response Order

Repeater Enabled Message No Response Order

Repeater Disabled message No Response Order

Loss of E-Lead on the Pulse Code Modulation

No Response from the Network System Management Module

No Response from the Module

No Trunk Response Order

No Disconnect Response

No Dispatch Interface Module Response

No System Network Bus Response

2-Way Not Able To Get Service

No Dial Tone Received

No Wink Received

No Trunk Connected To 2-Way

Lost A Registration Request Message

Repeater Interface Module Link Lost

CRVM Status - Data 2 0 = Good, 1 = Fail

CIM went to Standby

SNM SNB link restored

IDM and Console link lost

IDM and Console link back

Intra-Terminal Data Bus Lockup

Channel Status Bus Lockup

Network Interface Module Lockup

A-1

ERROR MESSAGES

MESSAGE

NO_MEM

BAD_ADRS

CLK_STAT

CLK_TKVR

UNEXP_DIM

DIM_INIT

DEV_ENAB

CIM_INIT

RESERVED

CCM_INIT

SNM_INIT

DEVNOTDEF

RPTR_ENA

RPTR_DIS

UID_TERM

UNEXPTRM

UID_RSGN

FAIL_TRM

FAIL_INT

SIDRMTO

NRSPSAO

FAIL_DYN

DRRMTO

SUDFAIL

SUDEXEFAIL

DYNEXEFAIL

UEXPDYNR

SYS_BOOT

SUDCFAIL

REGOFAIL

DIMRQFAIL

SNMRQFAIL

MAXDSC

IDLERROR

SNMIDLERR

TIM_INIT

NOTRKRSPSTR

TIMIDLERR

NAKTRNKREQ

TIMACKFAIL

DIMACKFAIL

SNMACKFAIL

DYNEXENACK

ENABLEFAIL

SA_NOCIMRE

SA_LSTCHNL

131

139

140

141

142

143

144

145

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

CODE

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

A.2 MAB ERROR MESSAGES FROM SYSTEM MANAGEMENT MODULE

DESCRIPTION

Out of Memory

Received Card Address Out of Range

Clock Status

Clock Takeover

Unexpected Dispatch Interface Module Acknowledge

Dispatch Interface Module Initialization Complete

Device Enabled

Channel Interface Module Initialization Complete

Conventional Channel Module Initialized

System Network Module Initialized

Device Not Defined at Initialization

Repeater Enable

Repeater Disabled

Unique Identification Terminated

Unexpected Unique Identification Termination

Unique Identification Reassigned

Failed Terminate Set Up

Failed Interrogate Set Up

Selected Unit Disable Time-out

No Response Suspend Audio Order

Failed Dynamic Reassignment Setup

Dynamic Reassignment Response Time-out

No Acknowledge to Selective Reassignment Order

Execute Selective Unit Disable Failure

Fail Execute of Dynamic Reassignment

Unexpected Dynamic Reassignment

System Boot Complete

Call Failure Prior to Selective Unit Disable

Radio Network Terminal Registration Out to Others Failure

No Response for Dispatch Interface Module to accept a Unique

Identification Call

No Response for System Network Module to Accept a Unique

Identification Call

Exceeded Number of Tries to Disconnect Device

Pointer Indicate Idle and Still on Timed List

System Network Module Idle Time-out Error

Telephone Interface Module Initialization

No Telephone Interface Module Response to Trunk Request

Telephone Interface Module Idle Time-out Error

No Acknowledge to a Telephone Interface Module Outgoing Request

No Response to Call Destination Order



No Acknowledge of Dynamic Reassignment by Mobile

Failure to Complete Enable of Card

System Analyzer No Channel Interface Module Response

System Analyzer Fail As Last Channel - Stopped Check

Channel Still "ON THE AIR"

A-2

MESSAGE

SA_NODETRM

SA_TESTMOB

SA_CHNFAIL

SA_BUSYOUT

SA_CHKIDLE

DCM_INIT

SUDRADDSBL

RMF_LOGIN

RMF_LOGOUT

VDM_INIT

NO_QSETUP

IDM_INIT

LEM_INIT

DF_NOCIMRE

GPM_IDMFAIL

GPM_ADFAIL

GPM_RCFAIL

ERROR MESSAGES

153

154

155

159

160

161

162

163

164

165

CODE

146

147

148

149

150

151

152

DESCRIPTION

System Analyzer Fail No Determination - Continue Checking

System Analyzer Test Mobile Failure

System Analyzer Channel Failure

System Analyzer Exceed Multiple Unique Identification Busy Count

System Analyzer Exceed Busy Resolve Time-out

Dispatch Channel Module Initialization

Selective Unit Disable Kill Not Allowed by Radio

A Remote Management Facility Login

A Remote Management Facility Logout

VDM Initialization

No Queue setup completion message

IDM Initialization

LEM Initialization

Dyn. Freq. No CIM Response

IDM failed to acknowledge patch setup

GPM failed to acknowledge patch add order

GPM failed to acknowledge reconfiguration order

A-3


ERROR MESSAGES

A-4

CALL SEQUENCES

APPENDIX B CALL SEQUENCES

B.1 GROUP CALL

B.1.1 MOBILE TO MOBILE ON SAME SITE

Use two mobiles with the same Home and list of

Group IDs. Select the same Group on the mobiles.

1. Press the PTT on Mobile-1.

•

The CIM associated with the active repeater changes from Idle Task ‘2’ to Receive Task “4”.

•

Mobile-2 receives the voice communication from

Mobile-1.

•

No DIMs receive voice communication.

2. Release the PTT on Mobile-1.

•

The active CIM returns to the Idle Task “2”.

•

Mobile-2 returns to Idle and is silent.

3. Repeat these steps using Mobile-2 as PTT Mobile.

B.1.2 MOBILE TO MOBILE WITH DIM

MONITORING


Group IDs. On the Dispatch Console (DC) select a

DIM and mobiles with a group that is common to both.


•

The CIM associated with the active repeater changes from Idle Task “2” to Receive Task “4”.

•

The associated DIM changes from Idle Task “2” to Receive Task “4”.

•

The DIM receives the voice communication.

•

Mobile-2 receives the voice communication from

Mobile-1.


•

The CIM returns to Idle Task “2”.

•

Mobile-2 returns to Idle and is silent.

•

The DIM returns to Idle Task “2” and no voice communication is heard at the DC.

3. Repeat these steps using Mobile-2 as PTT Mobile.

B.2 DISPATCH CONSOLE (DC) TO MOBILE

GROUP CALL


Group IDs. Select the DIM that contains this Group

ID.

1. Press the PTT function on the DC.

•

The associated DIM changes from the Idle Task

“2” to the Transmit Task “3”.

•

The Associated CIM is selected and changes from the Idle Task “2” to Transmit Task “3”.

•

The mobiles receive the voice communication.

2. Release the PTT on the DC.

•

The associated DIM returns to Idle Task “2”.

•

The associated CIM returns to Idle Task “2”.

If the associated DIM has Hang Time defined, the associated CIM enters Hang Task “7” for the defined time.

When the Hang Time has expired the associated

CIM returns to Idle Task “2”.

•

The mobiles return to idle and stop receiving.

B.3 MOBILE GROUP CALL TO DISPATCH

CONSOLE


Group IDs. On the Dispatch Console (DC) select a

DIM and mobiles with a group that is common to both.


•

The CIM associated with the active repeater changes from Idle Task “2” to Receive Task “4”.

•

The associated DIM changes from Idle Task “2” to Receive Task “4”.

•

The DIM receives the voice communication.

•

Mobile-2 receives the voice communication.

2. On the DC press the PTT of the DIM.

•

The associated DIM changes to Transmit Task

“3”.

•

The associated DIM changes to Duplex Task “6”.

B-1

CALL SEQUENCES

•

Mobile-2 receives voice communication from both the DC and Mobile-1.

3. Release the PTT of Mobile-1.

•

The associated CIM changes to Transmit Task

“3”.

•

Both mobiles now receive the DIM voice communication.

If the associated DIM has Hang Time defined, the associated CIM enters Hang Task “7” for the defined time.

When the Hang Time has expired the associated

CIM returns to Idle Task “2”.

•

The mobiles return to idle and are silent.

B.4 MOBILE TO UNIQUE ID

Use two mobiles defined to different Home and

Group ID.

NOTE: Some of these tasks change rapidly.

1. Mobile-1, the originating mobile, selects the Auxiliary Call group code.

2. Press the PTT of Mobile-1 to access the system.

•

Originating CIM (O-CIM), changes from Idle

Task “2” to Dial Tone Task “C”.


•

Mobile-1 hears “Dial Tone” from O-CIM.

4. Press the PTT of Mobile-1.

5. When Mobile-1's transmit light is lit, enter 4-digits of DTMF for the Unique ID of Mobile-2

(terminating mobile).


•

Mobile-1 hears the “Confirmation Tone” from the

O-CIM confirming the acceptance of the digits.

•

O-CIM changes to the Ringing Task “D”.

•

Mobile-1 hears “Ringing Tone” from the O-CIM.

•

Originating SNM (O-SNM) changes from Idle

Task “2” to SNM Outgoing Task “8”.

•

Destination SNM (D-SNM) changes from Idle

Task “2” to incoming Seize Task “3”.

•

D-SNM changes from Incoming Seize Task “3” to SNM Incoming Task “4”.

•

D-SNM changes to Incoming Channel Task “5”.

•

O-SNM changes to Outgoing Channel Task “9”.

•

Destination CIM (D-CIM) changes from Idle

Task “2” to Transmit Task “3”.

•

Mobile-2 hears “Ringing Tone”.


•

D-CIM changes to Duplex Task “6”.

•

O-CIM changes to Transmit Task “3”.

•

Mobile-1 hears the voice of Mobile-2.


•

D-CIM changes to Transmit Task “3”.

•

Mobile-1 is silent.


•

O-CIM changes to Duplex Task “6”.

•


10.Release the PTT on Mobile-1.

•

O-CIM changes to transmit Task “3”.

•

Mobile-2 is silent.


12.Press DTMF “#” key for longer than 1 second.

•

O-CIM changes to the End Call Task “E”.

•

Mobile-1 hears the “End Call Tone”.

•

O-CIM changes to Idle Task “2”.

•

O-SNM changes to the Idle Task “2”.

•

D-SNM changes to the End Call Task “C”.

•

D-CIM changes to the End Call Task “E”.

•


•

D-CIM changes to the Idle Task “2”.

•

D-SNM changes to the Idle Task “2”.

B-2

CALL SEQUENCES

B.5 MOBILE TO UNIQUE ID FOR A MOBILE

OUTSIDE SWITCH


Group ID.




•

The originating CIM (O-CIM), changes from Idle



•



5. When Mobile-1's transmit light is lit, Enter 7-DTMF digits, 3 for site outside the Switch and 4 for the

Unique ID of Mobile-2 (terminating mobile.


•

Mobile-1 hears the “Confirmation Tone” from the

O-CIM confirming the acceptance of the digits.

•

O-CIM changes to the Ringing Task “D”.

•

Mobile-1 hears “Ringing Tone” from the O-CIM.

•


Task “2” to SNM Outgoing Task “8”.

•


Task “2” to incoming Seize Task “3”.

•

D-SNM changes from Incoming Seize Task “3” to SNM Incoming Task “4”.

•


•


•



•

Mobile-2 hears “Ringing Tone”.


•

D-CIM changes to Duplex Task “6”.

•


•



•


•

Mobile-1 is silent.


•

O-CIM changes to Duplex Task “6”.

•



•

O-CIM changes to transmit Task “3”.

•

Mobile-2 is silent.



•


•


•


•

O-SNM changes to the Idle Task “2”.

•

D-SNM changes to the End Call Task “C”.

•


•


•

D-CIM changes to the Idle Task “2”.

•

D-SNM changes to the Idle Task “2”.

B.6 MOBILE TO DIRECTED GROUP CALL

(DTMF ENTRY WITHIN SWITCH)


Group ID.




•

The originating CIM (O-CIM), changes from Idle



•



B-3

CALL SEQUENCES

5. When Mobile-1's transmit light is lit, enter DTMF digits:

•

Enter 5-DTMF digits, 2 for Home channel and 3 for the Group ID desired.

•

Enter 8-DTMF digits, 3 for different site within

Switch, 2 for Home channel and 3 for Group ID desired.

6. Release the PTT of Mobile-1 to indicate completion of dialing.

•

O-CIM hears the “Confirmation Tone”.

•

Originating SNM (O-SNM) changes to SNM

Outgoing Task “8”.

•

Destination SNM (D-SNM) changes to Incoming

Seize Task “3”.

•

D-SNM changes to Incoming Task “4”.

•

Destination CIM (D-CIM) changes to Transmit

Task “3”.

•


•


•

O-CIM changes to Ringing Task “D”.

•

Mobile-1 hears the “Call Proceed Tone”.


•

O-CIM changes to Receive Task “4”.

•


•



•


•


•


•

Both SNMs change to the End Call Task “C”.

•


•


•

D-CIM and both SNMs change to the Idle Task

“2”.


•


•


•

Mobile-2, destination mobile, hears Mobile-1 voice communication.


•

O-CIM changes to Hang Task “7”.

•

D-CIM changes to Hang Task “7”.

•

Mobile-2 is silent.


•

D-CIM changes to Receive Task “4”.

•


•



•


•


•

Mobile-1 is silent.

B.7 MOBILE TO DIRECTED GROUP CALL (DT-

MF ENTRY OUTSIDE THE SWITCH)


Group ID.




•

Originating CIM (O-CIM), changes from Idle



•

Mobile-1 hears “Dial Tone” from the O-CIM.


5. When Mobile-1's transmit light is lit, enter DTMF digits:

•

Enter 5-DTMF digits, 2 for Home channel and 3 for the Group ID desired.

•

Enter 8-DTMF digits, 3 for different sites within

Switch, 2 for Home channel and 3 for Group ID desired.

B-4

CALL SEQUENCES

6. Release the PTT of Mobile-1 to indicate completion of dialing.

•

O-CIM hears the “Confirmation Tone”.

•

Originating SNM (O-SNM) changes to SNM


•

Destination SNM (D-SNM) changes to Incoming

Seize Task “3”.

•

D-SNM changes to Incoming Task “4”.

•

Destination CIM (D-CIM) changes to Transmit

Task “3”.

•


•


•

O-CIM changes to Ringing Task “D”.

•

Mobile-1 hears the “Call Proceed Tone”.


•


•


•

Mobile-2, destination mobile, hears Mobile-1 voice communication.


•


•


•

Mobile-2 is silent.


•

D-CIM changes to Receive Task “4”.

•


•



•


•

O-CIM changes to Hand Task “7”.

•

Mobile-1 is silent.


•


•


•



•

O-CIM changes to End Call Task “E”.

•


•


•

Both SNMs change to End Call Task “C”.

•

D-CIM changes to End Call Task “E”.

•

Mobile-2 hears “End Call Tone”.

•

D-CIM and both SNMs change to Idle Task “2”.

B.8 MOBILE ORIGINATED TELEPHONE CALL

1. Mobile selects the Telephone Call group code.

2. Press the mobile's PTT to access the system.

•

The associated CIM changes from Idle Task “2” to Dial Tone Task “C”.

3. Release the PTT of the mobile.

•

Mobile hears “Dial Tone” from the CIM.

4. Press the PTT of the mobile.

5. When the transmit light of the mobile is lit, enter

DTMF digits.

•

When the Call Processor is set for normal dialing translation, enter the required digits to exercise the dialing translation function.

•

When the Call Processor is set for PBX operation, enter the complete set of digits, no wait for second dial tone after the access digits.

6. Release the PTT of the mobile.

•

CIM hears the “Confirmation Tone”.

•

TIM changes from Idle Task “2” to TIM


•

When digit dialing is complete, the TIM changes to Channel Conversation Task “9”.

•

CIM changes to Ringing Task “D”.

•

Mobile hears landside progress tones, ringing, busy or called party answer.

7. Press the PTT on the mobile.

•

CIM changes to Duplex Task “6”.

•

Called party hears the mobile voice.

8. Release the PTT on the mobile.

•

CIM changes to Transmit Task “3”.

•

Mobile hears the called party.

B-5

CALL SEQUENCES

•

Called party does not hear the mobile.


•


•

Called party hears the mobile voice.

10.Press the DTMF “#” key for longer than 1 second and release the PTT.

•

CIM changes to End Call Task “E”.

•

Mobile hears the “End Call Tone”.

•

CIM changes to Idle Task “2”.

•

Mobile returns to idle and is silent.

•

TIM changes to End Call Task “C”.

•

TIM disconnects the telephone line.

•

TIM changes to Idle Task “2”.

B.9 LANDSIDE (TIM) ORIGINATE TO MOBILE

WITHIN SWITCH USING A DID LINE

1. Dial the desired number for a mobile within the

Switch.

•

The associated TIM changes from Idle Task “2” to Incoming Seize Task “3”.

•

CIM changes from Idle Task “2” to Transmit Task

“3”.

•

TIM changes to Incoming Channel Conversation

Task “5”.

•

Landside party and mobile hear “Ringing Tone”.


•

“Ringing Tone” is turned off.

•


•

Landside party hears the mobile voice.


•

Landside party hears silence.

•


•

Mobile hears the landside party.

4. The mobile disconnects by pressing the PTT and

DTMF “#” key for 1 second.

5. The landside party disconnects by pressing the

DTMF “#” key for 1 second.

•

CIM changes to the End Call Task “E”.

•


•

CIM changes to the Idle Task “2”.

•

Mobile is silent.

•

TIM changes to end Call Task “C”.

•

Landside party hears “End Call Tone”.

•

TIM disconnects the telephone line when landside disconnects.

•


B.10 LANDSIDE (TIM) ORIGINATE TO MOBILE

WITHIN SWITCH USING A 2WY LINE

1. Dial the desired number for the 2WY line.

•


•

Landside party hears the proceed tone.

2. The landside party enters the 4-DTMF digits of the

Unique ID of the mobile.

•


“3”.

•


Task “5”.

•

Landside party and the mobile hear “Ringing

Tone”.


•


•


•



•


•


•


5. Press mobile's PTT and DTMF “#” key for 1 second or landside party presses the DTMF “#” key for 1 second.

•


•


•


•

Mobile is silent.

•


•


•


B-6

CALL SEQUENCES

B.11 TIM ORIGINATE TO MOBILE OUTSIDE

SWITCH USING A DID LINE


1. Dial the desired number for a mobile within the

Switch.

•


•

TIM changes to TIM incoming Task “4”.

•


Task “2” to Incoming Seize Task “3”.

•

O-SNM changes to SNM Outgoing Task “8”.

•


Task “2” to Incoming Seize Task “3”.

•

D-SNM changes to SNM Incoming Task “4”.

•



•

D-DNM changes to Incoming Channel Task “5”.

•

O-SNM changes to TIM Outgoing Conversation

Task “E”.

•

TIM changes to SNM Incoming Conversation

Task “D”.

•


Tone”.


•


•


•



•


•


•


4. Mobile disconnects by pressing the PTT and DTMF

“#” key for 1 second.

5. Landside party disconnects by pressing the DTMF

“#” key for 1 second.

•


•


•


•

Mobile is silent.

•

Both SNMs change to End Call Task “C”.

•


•

Landside party hears “End Call Tone”.

•


•


•

Both SNMs change to Idle Task “2”.

B.12 LANDSIDE ORIGINATE TO MOBILE OUT-

SIDE SWITCH USING A 2WY LINE


1. Dial the desired number for the 2WY line.

•


•

TIM changes to TIM Incoming Task “4”.

•

Landside party hears a “Proceed Dialing Tone”.

2. The landside party enters the 4-DTMF digits of the

Unique ID of the mobile.

•


“3”.

•


Task “5”.

•


Tone”.


•


•

The CIM changes to Duplex Task “6”.

•



•


•


•


5. The mobile press the PTT and DTMF “#” key for 1 second or landside party presses the DTMF “#” key for 1 second.

•


•


•


•

Mobile is silent.

•


•


•


B-7

CALL SEQUENCES

SNM UNIQUE ID

REQUEST

IDLE SERVICE PARSER

DIM REQUEST

DIM REQUEST

NO DIM

SNM IDLE

WAIT DIM RESPONSE

NO RESPONSE

DIM ACKNOWLEDGE

FAILURE

WAIT FOR SNM ACKNOWLEDGE

TO CALL DESTINATION

DIM IDLE

CIM/SNM

CONVERSATION

CIM IDLE

ACKNOWLEDGE

SNM IDLE

SNM IDLE

SNM IDLE

DIM/SNM CONVERSATION

DIM IDLE

SNM DISCONNECT

SNM ACKNOWLEDGE

DISCONNECT

WAIT FOR SNM IDLE

Figure B-1 SNM UNIQUE ID REQUEST FLOWCHART

B-8

DIM UNIQUE ID

CALL REQUEST

CIM IDLE

CIM / DIM

CONVERSATION

IDLE SERVICE PARSER

SNM REQUEST

NO CARDS

SNM REQUEST

DIM IDLE

INTERNAL CIM

SNM ACKNOWLEDGE

SNM

IDLE WAIT FOR ACKNOWLEDGE

TO CALL DESTINATION ORDER

DIM IDLE FAILURE

DIM ACKNOWLEDGE

SNM IDLE

SNM IDLE

DIM / SNM

CONVERSATION

DIM IDLE

SNM IDLE WAIT FOR

SNM IDLE

SNM

DISCONNECT

SNM ACKNOWLEDGE DISCONNECT

Figure B-2 DIM UNIQUE ID REQUEST FLOWCHART

CALL SEQUENCES

CIM DTMF AUXILIARY CALL

IDLE SERVICE PARSER

SNM REQUEST

WAIT SNM

CIM ACKNOWLEDGE

FAILURE

ACKNOWLEDGE

CIM IDLE

NO DIM

DISCONNECT

CIM CARD

SNM MODULE

RESPONSE

NO WAIT DIM

RESPONSE

CIM / SNM

WAIT DIM

RESPONSE

CONVERSATION DIM

ACKNOWLEDGE

CIM IDLE

SNM IDLE

SNM

DISCONNECT

CIM / DIM

CONVERSATION

CIM IDLE

SNM ACKNOWLEDGE

DISCONNECT

SNM IDLE WAIT FOR

SNM IDLE

Figure B-3 CIM DTMF AUXILIARY CALL FLOWCHART

B-9

CALL SEQUENCES

1 2 4 3 10

DIALED DIGITS

AND NUMBERS

OF DIGITS

11

USED WHEN CONNECTED TO STANDARD LINES.

IF PBX IS USED ALWAYS USE DEFAULT.

ALL OTHERS 8 7

DIGIT = 0

NO

YES

NO FIRST

DIGIT = 1

YES YES FIRST

DIGIT = 1

NO NO FIRST

DIGIT = 1

ALLOW 0+

DIALING

YES

NO NO AN N11

NUMBER

YES

HOME

AREA

NO

YES

LOCAL

DEFAULT

BLOCKED

LOCAL

DEFAULT

NO ON TRUNK/

AREA LIST

YES

TEST FIRST

2-DIGITS

= 01

= 01

SET TO

DEFAULT

LONG

DISTANCE

NO

GLOBAL

AREA

CODE

TRUNK

YES

NO

RETURN TRUNK

LIST NUMBER

AND FORMAT

AS 7-DIGITS

ALLOW

LONG

DISTANCE

YES

BLOCKED

= 011

YES ALLOW DIRECT

INTERNATIONAL

NO

NO

TEST FIRST

3-DIGITS

= 011

YES

ALLOW 0+

DIALING

YES

FIRST

DIGIT = 0

NO

BLOCKED

RETURN SELECTED

TRUNK AND FORMAT

LOCAL

TRUNK

YES

ON HOME AREA

EXCHANGE LIST

NO

A LOCAL

EXCHANGE

NO

YES

RETURN DEFAULT

TRUNK 7-DIGITS

RETURN 8-DIGITS

ON LONG

DISTANCE TRUNK

YES

FORMAT AND

RETURN TRUNK

NUMBER

Figure B-4 DIALED DIGITS AND NUMBER OF DIGITS FLOWCHART

B-10

CALL SEQUENCES

TIM INCOMING

IDLE SERVICE PARSER

DIM

REQUEST

WAIT FOR

DIM RESPONSE

DIM

ACKNOWLEDGE

NO

RESPONSE

TIM ACKNOWLEDGE

TO CALL

NO

DESTINATION ORDER

RESPONSE

TIM

RESPONSE

TIM

IDLE

TIM / DIM

CONVERSATION

DIM

IDLE

IDLE

TIM WAIT

FOR IDLE

INTERNAL

WAIT FOR

SNM IDLE

CIM

TIM / CIM

TIM

IDLE

CONVERSATION

ACK.

TIM

DISCONNECT

IDLE

NO

SNM

ACK.

SNM

REQUEST

WAIT FOR SNM

ACKNOWLEDGE

SNM

ACKNOWLEDGE

SNM

DISCONNECT

SNM

IDLE

ACKNOWLEDGE

WAIT FOR TIM

ACKNOWLEDGE

NO

RESPONSE

TIM

ACKNOWLEDGE

TIM / SNM

CONVERSATION

TIM

IDLE

Figure B-5 TELEPHONE TIM INCOMING FLOWCHART

B-11

CALL SEQUENCES

CIM TELEPHONE CALL REQUEST

IDLE SERVICE PARSER

TIME OUT

TIM OUTGOING

REQUEST

FAILURE

WAIT FOR TIM

ACKNOWLEDGE

TIM

ACKNOWLEDGE

WAIT FOR

LANDSIDE

ANSWER

CIM IDLE

CIM

ACKNOWLEDGE

DISCONNECT

CIM CARD

TIM IDLE

CIM / TIM

CONVERSATION

IDLE

IDLE

TIM

DISCONNECT

ACKNOWLEDGE

TIM WAIT

FOR IDLE

Figure B-6 TELEPHONE CALLING CIM TELEPHONE CALL REQUEST FLOWCHART

B-12

CALL SEQUENCES

USER INTERFACE REQUEST FOR

DYNAMIC REASSIGNMENT BIT SET

SETUP DYNAMIC REASSIGNMENT

MODULE

RESPONSE

TIME OUT

DYNAMIC

REASSIGNMENT

BID CLEARED

IDLE

FAILURE

REPORT

EXECUTE

REQUEST

SUCCESS

REPORT

WAIT FOR EXECUTE

Figure B-7 DYNAMIC REASSIGNMENT USER INTERFACE REQUEST FLOWCHART

USER INTERFACE REQUEST FOR

SELECTIVE UNIT DISABLE

SETUP OF

SELECTIVE UNIT DISABLE

ACKNOWLEDGE

REQUEST

FAILURE

(LEAVE BIT SET)

WAIT FOR

SELECTIVE UNIT

DISABLE EXECUTE

COMPLETE

(INDICATE RESULTS)

IDLE

Figure B-8 SELECTIVE UNIT DISABLE USER INTERFACE REQUEST FLOWCHART

B-13

Part Number 001-3139-005

10-03 Printed in U.S.A.

E.F. Johnson Company MULTI-NET II Setup And Alignment Manual

MULTI-NET

II SWITCH

SET-UP AND

ALIGNMENT

ULTI

ET

ERIES

WITCH

ET

P

ND

LIGNMENT

MULTI-NET

®

II

3000 SERIES SWITCH

SETUP AND ALIGNMENT MANUAL

SAFETY INFORMATION

WARNING

LAND MOBILE PRODUCT WARRANTY

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT’D)

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT’D)

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT’D)

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT’D)

APPENDIX A ERROR MESSAGES

APPENDIX B CALL SEQUENCES

LIST OF FIGURES

LIST OF FIGURES (CONT’D)

LIST OF TABLES

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT’D)

SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION

SECTION 2 3000 SERIES SWITCH

SECTION 3 ARCHITECTURE

SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 4 SYSTEM RACK

“A”

“B”

“A”

“B”

SECTION 5 CALL PROCESSOR

SECTION 6 NETWORK INTERFACE MODULE (NetNIM)

SECTION 7 BASIC BOARD MODULE (BBM)

SECTION 8 CHANNEL INTERFACE MODULE (CIM)

SECTION 9 CONVENTIONAL CHANNEL MODULE (CCM)

SECTION 10 DISPATCH CHANNEL MODULE (DCM)

SECTION 11 DISPATCH INTERFACE MODULE (DIM)

SECTION 12 INTELLIGENT DISPATCH MODULE (IDM)

SECTION 13 SYSTEM NETWORK MODULE (SNM)

SECTION 14 TELEPHONE INTERFACE MODULE (TIM)

S5

TOP

S4 S4

R34

FRONT

ADDED CAPS

SECTION 15 VOTER DIAGNOSTICS MODULE (VDM)

SECTION 16 POWER TERMINATION MODULE (PTM)

SECTION 17 LOGGING ENCODER MODULE (LEM)

SECTION 18 VOICE TONE MODULE (VTM)

SECTION 19 WIDE AREA MODULE (WAM)

SECTION 20 MULTI-NET CONSOLE MODULE (MCM)

SECTION 21 CONVENTIONAL PATCH MODULE (CPM)

SECTION 22 POWER SUPPLY

SECTION 23 BACKPLANE

"A"

"B"

"A"

"B"

SECTION 24 INTERCOM

APPENDIX A ERROR MESSAGES

APPENDIX B CALL SEQUENCES

Related manuals

E.F. Johnson Company

VR-CM50

SIGMATEK

VDM 086

Key Digital

KD-IP1080